Home

AUTODYN User Manual Version 12.1

Contents

1. New Press this button to create a new structured part Load Press this button to load a structured Part from a Part Library This option is not available for unstructured Parts because for these types of Parts the ANSYS Workbench project data storage can be used as a part library Copy Press this button to copy an existing Part to a new Part This is valid for both structured as well as unstructured Parts Save Press this button to save structured Parts to a Part Library This option is not available for unstructured Parts because for these types of Parts the ANSYS Workbench project data storage can be used as a part library Delete Press this button to delete a structured unstructured Part The remaining dialog in this panel depends on the Solver used by the selected Part All Structured Solvers except SPH Zoning Fill Bounday Gauges Motions Solver IJK Range Activation Rename Print SPH Solver Geometry Zoning Pack Fill Boundary Gauges Solver Activation Rename Print Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 215 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Unstructured Solvers Zoning Fil Bots Gane H Solver Rone Ain iam Pi Zoning Press this button to zone a structured Part Unstructured Parts cannot be generated an unstructured Part can on
2. Type ExtemalGap Trajectory Interaction Gap Gap size v 0 007500 GapType Extemal f Quick Check Calculate IRAE intemal Check Retain inertia of eroded nodes Prevent erosion of degenerate cells Interaction by Part MV Self interaction Safety Factor mm 455 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 2D 3D This panel lets you set up interactions between Lagrangian Parts Parts using a Lagrange Shell Beam or SPH solver 456 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Lagrange Lagrange Introduction AUTODYN offers 2 types of Lagrange Lagrange interaction contact methods Gap contact In this contact method each surface segment is surrounded by a contact detection zone The dimensions of this contact zone is called Gap size This means that initially the outside surfaces of the parts in the contact should be separated by the gap distance Gap Shell Lagrange Any nodes entering the contact detection zone of a surface segment are repelled by a force normal to the segment surface and proportional to the depth of penetration of the node into the contact detection zone F F R F R R R The interaction conserves linear and angular momentum To assure a stable interaction
3. 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information iii AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Import LS DYNA cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeees Pull down Menu Import Nastran cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeees Pull Down Menus Import Convert IJK to Unstructured cccceceeees Pull down Menu Setup Symmetry ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeenteeeeeeeees EXECUTION ec eee ee Re NAN AM a Ne te Ae Ne ee Pull down Menu Execution ccccccccecececcecceeececcecececcescaeececceeaueceeceeseeeees Pull down Menu View Slideshow Setup eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees Pull down Menu View Performance Profiler cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees O IOS 2c nda Rie teeth ge Rhee E deta a A Mande a a eta Pull down Menu Opus sicccscteieicteattictatettietela tate ee tate lurietetticcateliaetels ie Pull down Menu Options Interactivity eeececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Pull down Menu Options Clipping Planes cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Pull down Menu Options Default Settings c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Pull down Menu Options Pause LIC Nnse ccccccccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Pull down Menu Options Create User Subroutine Project e Plots Select Contour Variable cccccceceeee
4. Create All interacting Parts in you model must be separated by at least the Gap size Press this button to automatically insert the required gap between Parts You may want to insert gaps manually using the Translate and or Scale options in the zoning Panel Zoning panel Check Press this button to check that the Gap size is valid and that all Parts involved in interactions are separated by the Gap size Include edge on edge impacts Check this box if you want the interaction calculation to include testing for edge on edge impacts significantly more computing is required if you check this box Work unit size Select the size of work unit to be used for interactions Average The work unit size is based on the average cell dimension Smallest The work unit size is based on the smallest element dimension Largest The work unit size is based on the largest element dimension Erosion Retain inertia of eroded nodes Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 481 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to retain the inertial of eroded nodes otherwise eroded nodes are removed from the model Prevent erosion of degenerate elements Check this box if you want the interaction calculation to be used to stop elements from becoming degenerate This option only works for Lagrange
5. Import Options After browsing for an LS DYNA keyword file select import options in this dialog Retain LS DYNA part definitions Select this option to name the important parts from definitions within the LS DYNA file Otherwise generic names are automatically generated for the parts Merge duplicate materials Select this option to merge duplicate materials Check Shell orientation Select this option to check for inconsistent or non manifold shell meshes If the ee and manifold you should re orient the mesh to have consistent LS DYNA Keyword File Format Both formatted and free formatted comma delimited LS DYNA keyword files can be imported into AUTODYN The standard used is based on version 970 of LS DYNA The primary use of the LS DYNA reader is to allow you to define a mesh to be used with the unstructured solvers In addition other information regarding material definitions boundary conditions and initial conditions can be imported and stored in AUTODYN 76 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual An overview of the information which can be imported into AUTODYN from an LS DYNA keyword file is given below Mesh The mesh represented as nodal positions and element connectivity is read into AUTODYN and sorted to produce Parts and Components A Part is a col
6. S x 2 Ys g lo 7 gt where o and o are normal and shear stress at the bond S and S are the maximum allowed normal and shear stress limits and exon and exps are user defined exponential coefficients The normal stress at the bond o is nonzero for tensile values only Selection method Bonded joins can be generated in AUTODYN on a part basis as well as on a multiple face group basis Bonded Connections can also be defined in an Explicit Dynamic system and automatically transferred into a linked AUTODYN system Notes e The element variable BOND_STATUS is used to record how many nodes are actively bonded to the faces of an element This variable can be contoured to verify that bonds are correctly defined If a bond fails during the simulation the bond status will show a reduction in the number of active bonds When an element has no remaining bonds the value of BOND STATUS is set to 1 0 452 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual e Bonded contact is only available with trajectory contact e Bonded contact is available for unstructured volume shell and beam elements Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 453 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates P
7. You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing se next to the option in this window Material If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set select the material you want to use to fill your Part from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Shell Thickness Velocity Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 271 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Copy Copy Part This window lets you copy an existing Part to a new Part Part List This box lists all the existing Parts in your model Select the part you want to copy from this list New Part Name Enter the name of your new Part in this field Pressing _ lt creates your new part 272 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Delete Delete Parts This window lets you delete Parts from your model Select the Part s you want to delete and press L
8. 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D Velocity ia Set polygon velocity Joe Select velocity boundary condition vel Cons This window lets you attach a velocity boundary condition the selected polygon All polygon points not attached to a Part will use this velocity Select the boundary condition you want to use from the list and press aa Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 503 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D Porosity Kad Set polygon porosity Joey Polygon porosity This window lets you set porosity for your Polygon By default a Polygon completely covers the Euler Parts it is coupled to Setting porosity greater than zero allows partial flow in the Euler Parts under the Polygon Enter a porosity factor between 0 0 and 1 0 504 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D New Interaction a New Interaction Joe Enter name of new interaction SC
9. 2D Window 3D Window This window lets you change the symmetry used in you model 88 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Execution Pull down Menu Execution MB ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN Fie Import Setup Batceteram View Options Help Run Interactively a 3 Eea i see View L Plots Pos Select Parts Cycle fenonan Settings Select plot type for selected part s Fill type Additional comnonents This pull down menu lets you execute your calculation Run Interactively Lets you execute you problem interactively This is the same as pressing gt Run on the Navigation bar Batch Runner Lets you run one or more of your models in batch mode i e without graphics Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 89 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Execute Batch Runner E AUTODYN Batch Runner D promectile penetiation files do0 ATD amoumpact4 Oad Watna D AdvancedMatenaIModeling Detonation detonation indrect snulti_O ad Waiting D AdvancedM ateriaModeling Detonation detonation indwect_O ad Waring Load Jobjs from File Save Job List to Fie This Window lets you set up and run si
10. Contains proprietary and confidential information 171 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Set Scales Set scales Reset X Reset Y M Major Tick Lines This window lets you set your own scales for history plots Minimum These fields let you set the minimum values for your X and Y scales Maximum These fields let you set the maximum values for your X and Y scales Increment These fields let you set the X and Y increments where tick marks will be placed on the scales Reset X Press this button to reset the maximum and minimum X values to those calculated automatically by AUTODYN Reset Y Press this button to reset the maximum and minimum Y values to those calculated automatically by AUTODYN 172 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Major Tick Lines Check this box if you want major tick lines to extend from left to right and top to bottom across your plot Major Tick Style This pull down menu lets you choose the line style used to drawn tick lines solid dashed etc Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 173 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual
11. Define Redefine Press this button to set the shell nodes you want to be jetting nodes The following window will appear Sie x ka Define Jetting Enter the range of shell nodes you want to be jetting nodes Clear Press this button to clear undefine all current jetting nodes 376 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Unstructured Solid Pressing the Solvers button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog for unstructured Solid Parts in the lower region of the panel Solver Options r Hex Integration Exact m Hez Hourglass Control AD Standard v viscous coefficient 0 100000 Tet Integration iscp v Hex Integration The unstructured 8 noded constant strain hexahedral element is available in two forms e Finite volume formulation with exact volume integration Wilkins 1974 Default e Finite element formulation using approximate Gaussian quadrature Hallquist 1976 The finite volume formulation is the default option and recommended for most applications involving large deformation or warped meshes This formulation is the same as that used in the Structured IJK Lagrange solver The finite element formulation is included as a solver option and provides efficiency improvements over the above
12. Each line gives the cycle number the cycle time and the wall clock time that the calculation used to compute the cycle in milliseconds If the line ends with update this indicates that work unit information for the interaction logic was updated on that cycle Such cycles usually take longer to compute The profiler also shows you visually how well balanced your calculation is In the example shown above Balance is a measure of the relative CPU time spent on each task for each cycle in the simulation So a balance of 1 0 for each task is the ideal most efficient goal A balance of less than 1 0 means that a task is under utilized does not have enough work to do A balance of greater than 1 0 means that a task is over utilized has too much work to do Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 97 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Options Pull down Menu Options AD ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN File Import Ag Execution View Koniara Help BEHARR a Clipping Planes L Default Settings Pause License Plots a Select Parts Create User Subroutine Project Settings This pull down menu lets you set various GUI options Interactivity Lets you set how the mouse and keyboard is used for the Tool Bar operations that manipulate images in the view panel Clipping Planes Lets you set cli
13. History Set Plot Styles Set Plot Styles Select Line Format This window lets you set the color style and thickness of lines for each plot Plot Number Plots are numbered in the order you specify them starting at 1 The box on the left lets you select a plot number whose style you wish to set Color Select a color for the selected plot from the top two rows on the right Line Style Select a line style for the selected plot from the next four rows on the right Line Thickness Select a line thickness for the selected plot from the bottom row on the right User plot title 174 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to supply your own title for the plot The default title is History Plot Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 175 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Set Legend Position This window lets you place the plot legend anywhere in the view Use the two sliders to adjust the horizontal and vertical position of the legend until it s where you want it 176 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc
14. Line thickness 10 600000 Lo sl x Iv This window lets you set or modify parameters for a plot to be included in a multiple variable plot Ident This pull down menu lets you choose the Ident for the plot from the models you have loaded Gauge This box lets you select the gauge to be plotted Y Variable Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 169 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This pull down menu lets you pick the Y Variable X Variable This pull down menu lets you pick the X Variable Line color This pull down menu lets you pick the color of the line Line style This pull down menu lets you pick the line style solid dashed etc Line thickness This box lets you set the line thickness 170 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Min Max Min max 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 This window displays the maximum and minimum values for each history plot shown in the current view X min is the X value at which the minimum Y value occurs Y min is the minimum Y value X max is the X value at which the maximum Y value occurs Y max is the maximum Y value Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved
15. Range will Include Exclude BLAST WALL WK range From To l From J fi Tods This window lets you define a detonation point X Y Coordinates Enter the X Y Z coordinates of the detonation point in these fields Compute Initiation Time Select whether you want to specify a detonation time or have it computed by AUTODYN If selected AUTODYN will compute the detonation time using paths through the explosive from other detonation points You must specify the initiation time for at least one detonation point plane cylinder or sphere Initiation Time Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 519 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented Range will Include Exclude region For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the excluded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range of application lJ range Enter the IJ range you want to use to limit
16. Time delay Select one or more files in the slide sequence and rotate the dial to set the time delay you want to apply to them a slide s time delay is the time in seconds for which it is shown Instead of using the dial you can alternatively type the time delay in the field below the dial Loop Check the box if you want your slide show to replay automatically Run Press this button to play the current slide sequence The entire sequence is played irrespective of which files are currently selected Stop Press this button to stop playing the current slide sequence Forward Backward These buttons let you quickly change your selection to the preceding Backward or following Forward file in the slide sequence Since this procedure automatically updates the View panel this is a good way of viewing your slides manually Extract GIF Press this button to extract individual gif files from an animated GIF and place them in the current directory Warning This option removes the current slide sequence and replaces it with a sequence containing only the newly extracted files irrespective of the current search pattern Save Seq Press this button to store the current slide sequence in a sequence file Load Seq Press this button to load a sequence stored in a sequence file and apply it to the current directory Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential inform
17. Timestep factor Note that this option is only applicable for the Displacement Only method The initial timestep from the AUTODYN solution is multiplied by the timestep factor The resulting time PVELTM is used together with the nodal displacements from the ANSYS Mechanical analysis to calculate constant nodal velocities These nodal velocities are applied to the AUTODYN model over PVELTM in order to initialize the AUTODYN nodes to the correct positions 206 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Initial Conditions Delete Delete Initial Conditions x Select intial condition s to be deleted This window lets you delete Initial Condition Sets from your model Select the Initial Condition Set s you want to delete and press EA Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 207 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Boundaries Boundaries Boundary Definitions Zero x vel Zero Y vel Constant Z Constant P New Modify Delete Review This panel lets you create Boundary Conditions that can be applied to Parts Boundary Condition List The box at the top of this panel lists the Boundary Conditions you have currently defined
18. 0 model_interactivity_default 0 graded_background 1 OpenGL_for_slides smote joincdtaces n winded eka c PENA aGiate badane SE SA P mouse_option translate keyboard_option_translate Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 25 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual mouse_option_toolbar EEE PE T mouse_option_examine E E A E E SA E OEE use_prepost_only onia ai You can alter the contents of this file to customize the startup of AUTODYN You can use any text editor to make your changes e g Notepad or MS Word You can set the following parameters in this file Application window width This sets the width of the AUTODYN application window at startup Application window height This sets the height of the AUTODYN application window at startup Message window visibility This switch sets the visibility of the message window on startup 0 Message window hidden 1 Message window visible Manual refresh default This switch sets manual refresh on or off For large models you may want to have full control on the refreshing of the plot window 0 Manual refresh off 1 Manual refresh on Background color This switch sets the color of the background for the View Panel on startup 26 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential informa
19. 1 0e 4 MASS SCALING SUMMARY BY PART PART MASS ADDED MASS TOTAL MASS ADDED 1 VOLUME 2 307E 04 4 945E 00 2 307E 04 2 144E 02 2 VOLUME 2 035E 05 0 000E 00 2 035E 05 0 000E 00 Timestep increased by factor of 5 for the addition of 0 02 of the Part mass Example application of mass scaling Important notes and limitations e Mass scaling will only be applied to Unstructured Elements Parts e Mass scaling is only applied to elements filled with materials which use a Linear or Hyperelastic equation of state e The actual timestep used in a simulation will generally be lower than the Min CFL timestep you define Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 585 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual o A safety factor is applied to get the actual timestep default 2 3 o The timestep used at cycle 1 of the simulation is additionally reduced by a factor of 2 The timestep is then allowed to increase by a maximum of 10 per cycle o Large velocities can affect the timestep at cycle 0 o Other features of the code will influence the timestep such as artificial viscosity blending Gap contact For Beams and Tet ANP elements the minimum CFL timestep will be increased by using mass scaling However due to nodal averaging of some quantities that influence the timestep the actual user defined CFL timestep may not be achieved
20. A summary of the contribution of mass scaling applied to the model can be obtained through o Plotting a contour of variable Mass Scale This is a ratio of current mass to original mass with scaling o Review the prt file output activated using Output Print Energy Summary 586 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Controls Global Erosion A new global erosion option has been implemented that can be used to define global erosion criteria for all elements in the model The global erosion options are only available for unstructured elements Global Erosion Erode by geometric strain Erosion strar f oo0000e 020 Erode by timestep Erosion timestep f1 o0o000e020 Erode after element failure Three erosion criteria have been implemented and can be used in combination in an analysis e Global Erosion by Geometric Strain o The user can define a single erosion strain that will be used for all elements in the model The minimum of the global erosion strain and the local material erosion strain if specified will be used to check for element erosion Global Erosion by Timestep o The user can define a single erosion timestep that will be used for all elements in the model The maximum of the global and the local material based erosion timestep i
21. AUTODYN User Manual Version 12 1 ANSYS Inc Southpointe 275 Technology Drive Canonsburg PA 15317 ansysinfo ansys com http www ansys com T 724 746 3304 F 724 514 9494 Release 12 1 November 2009 ANSYS Inc is certified to ISO 9001 2008 AUTODYN User Manual Copyright and Trademark Information 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Unauthorized use distribution or duplication is prohibited ANSYS ANSYS Workbench AUTODYN CFX FLUENT and any and all ANSYS Inc brand product service and feature names logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS Inc or its subsidiaries located in the United States or other countries ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS Inc under license All other brand product service and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners Disclaimer Notice THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS INC ITS SUBSIDIARIES OR LICENSORS The software products and documentation are furnished by ANSYS Inc its subsidiaries or affiliates under a software license agreement that contains provisions concerning non disclosure copying length and nature of use compliance with exporting laws warranties disclaimers limitations of liability and remedies and other provisions The software products and documentation may be used disclosed tr
22. Balance Automatically If you select this option you can invoke the load balancing algorithms use if you had selected Automatic assignment of the Sub domains to Tasks to distribute your Sub domains over a specific number of Tasks Number of tasks Enter the number of Tasks over which you want to distribute your Sub domains Balance Now 546 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to perform the distribution Manually assign to tasks If you select this option dialog is presented which lets you manually assign blocks of Sub domains to a specific Task kal Task Assignment EJ Assign Subdomains to Tasks C Automatic Manual PROJECTILE l sec 3 J sec 2 K sec 4 TARGET l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGET2 l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGETS l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 CURRENTLY USING 1 TASK S Haun See PROJECTILE IMAX 9 JMAX 5 KMAX 15 From Section to l Section From J Section toJ Section From K Section to K Section Assign to task Assign Now Block to be assigned In the fields provided specify the J and K section range for the block of Sub domains you want to assign to a Task Assign to Task Enter the Task to which you want to assign the block of Sub domains in this field Assign N
23. I J K Plane Press this button to fill a plane in index space Node Press this button to fill a node Unused Press this button to fill a block in index space with unused elements Composite Press this button to fill a composite shell Fill Multiple Parts 320 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Multi Fill Press this button to quickly fill multiple Parts Additional Fill Options Datafile Press this button to read or write a datafile for General Remapping Part Fill Press this button to fill an Euler Part from using Lagrange or Fill Parts Block Remap Press this button to read or write a datafile for Fast Block Remapping Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 321 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Block Fill Part Select J and K range to Fill From To l From J To J From K To K Initial Cond Material STEEL Densiy Int Energy x velocity Y velocity Z velocity Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical EA v This window lets you fill a index block within the current Part Select I J and K range to Fill Input the I J and K range that you
24. Initial Conditions Initial Conditions Initial Conditions Bea Initialize using ANSYS Mechanical Results V Activate ewe a Transierype Dupoy 7 Resut time 1 000000e 003 Timestep factor 100 000000 This panel lets you create Initial Condition Sets that can be used in Fill operations for Parts You do not have to use an Initial Condition Set to fill a Part but there is a major advantage in using one Any subsequent changes you make to an Initial Condition Set are automatically applied to the Parts that have been filled using that Initial Condition Set This means you don t have to refill the Parts this is currently not true for Euler Parts Initial Condition Set List Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 199 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The box at the top of this panel lists the Initial Condition Sets you have currently defined for your model You can select an Initial Condition Set in this list New Press this button to define a new Initial Condition Set Modify Press this button to modify the selected Initial Condition Set Delete Press this button to delete one or more Initial Condition Sets from your model Review Press this button to review the parameters for the selected Initial Condition Set in a browser window Implicit Explicit Model Initialization
25. Lets you save the current model using the current Ident for the filename to a binary file Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 47 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Save Project Lets you save the Workbench project and ensures that the AUTODYN analysis model and all Workbench related data is saved to disk Save As Lets you save the current model using a new Ident for the filename Save As Version Lets you save the current model in a format supported by a previous version Export to Version Lets you save the current model outside the Workbench project in a format supported by a previous version Manage Folders Lets you manage your project folders Save settings Lets you save the settings for the current plot in a settings file Load settings Lets you load and apply plot settings from a saved settings file Print Lets you output data for the current plot to a printer Export PostScript Lets you output data for the current plot to a PostScript file Export VRML Lets you output data for the current plot to a VRML file Save Formatted Lets you save the current model using the current Ident for the filename to a formatted ascii file Export Formatted Lets you save the current model to a formatted ascii file 48 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains
26. Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Output the data from the current plot Write UHS for current history plot or output all the gauge data from a history file Write Output for all gauges and variables in selected ident Set scales AUTODYN automatically chooses scales for your plots based on minimum and maximum values of the data Pressing this button lets you set your own scales Plot Styles Press this button to set the color style and thickness of lines for each plot Legend Position Press this button to position the legend anywhere in the view 160 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Single Variable Plot Single Variable Plot Gauge 1 Ident Ident 0 ben3d1 v haugett 2 a Gauge 3 Y Var IXVELOCITY g Gauge 4 a Gauget 5 Gauget 6 XVa TIME i Gauge 7 Gauge 8 ow xliv This window lets you compose a single variable plot Single variable plots can contain one or more plots histories for the same X and Y variables Ident This pull down menu lets you select an Ident from the models you have loaded Y Var This pull down menu lets you choose the variable assigned to the Y axis X Var This pull down menu lets you choose the variable assigned to the X axis most often TIME Histories to display From the list on the l
27. Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 273 AUTODYN User Manual Parts IJK Range Kd Modify IJK Range From From J From K This window lets you modify the IJK range of a structured Part Enter new IJK ranges for the Part in the fields provided If you cut a range the corresponding elements are deleted from the Part If you extend a range new unused elements are added to the Part Use zero or negative indices to add J or K lines to the lower end of ranges e g changing the I range above to run From 4 To 12 will add 5 I lines at the lower end of the Part and 3 I lines at the upper end of the Part The new I range will then run from 1 to 17 with the original I lines moved to l 5 through l 14 274 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Activation Activation Times nie oea Deactivation time 1 010000e 020 LO This window lets you set the activation and deactivation times for a structured Part Activation Deactivation times cannot be set for unstructured Parts The default values ensure the Part is active for the entire calculation Activation Time Ent
28. Resolution This slider lets you choose the marker resolution Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 139 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Eroded Nodes Eroded Node Settings This window lets you set the node size for plotting eroded nodes Enter an integer number The higher the number the larger the node 140 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Unused Regions Unused Plot Settings This window lets you set options for the plotting of unused regions Gridlines Select whether you want to plot the outline or grid for unused zones and whether the outline grid is drawn in black or white Plot contours Check this box if you want the contour variable contoured on unused faces for contour plots Otherwise the face is displayed in grey Opacity Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 141 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This slider lets you set the opacity for unused regions An opacity of 1 0 means you cannot see inside the region An opacity of 0 0 is equivalent
29. This window lets you delete one or more components Select the components you want to delete in the list and press wA 406 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Material ia Select material to fill component Material STEEL Density w 7 900000 Int Energy 0 000000 This window lets you fill all Parts of the selected Component with a material Material Select the material you want to use to fill your Component from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing sb next to the option in this window Material Parameters Enter material parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 407 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Velocity ka Set velocity of component x velocity 0 000000 Y velocity 0 000000 Z velocity 1 000000e 003 R velocity 0 000000 This window lets you assign a velocity to all Parts of the selected Component Enter the velocity components in the fields provided and press 408 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All
30. Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000 Start Radius 0 000000 End Radius 0 000000 Length LI 0 000000 Starting surface Flat Convex Concave End surface fe Flat Convex C Concave This predef is a cylinder with its axis parallel to the Z axis Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow cylinder Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual If you choose a hollow cylinder you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the cylinder Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of the starting surface of your cylinder in the fields provided Start Radius End Radius You can specify different radii for the starting and end faces of your cylinder For a regular cylinder constant radius set the starting radius equal to the end radius Length Enter the length of your cylinder in this field Start Surface End surface The starting and end surfaces of your cylinder can be flat concave or convex If you select a concave or convex surface you will have to specify its radius of curvature Ogive Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains propri
31. a b Normal impact onto Lagrangian target in AUTODYN 3D a initial configuration b shape charge penetrates target Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 339 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Part Fill kal Part Fill Material to be replaced STEEL This window lets you fill an Euler Part by mapping the materials and initial conditions of an existing structured Lagrange or Fill Part or unstructured volume element parts into the Euler Part Select Part to fill into current Part In this box select the Lagrange or Fill Part you want to use to fill your current Euler Part Material to be replaced Select the material to be replaced during the fill operation this information is only used if Euler cells contain multiple materials 340 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Mesh of Projectile and Target Multi material mesh filled with Unstructured Part Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 341 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Block Remap ia Fa
32. 0 000000 Index not for All Select the J or K index for the surface I J K straight not for All Select one of these options if you want surface nodes to be generated along straight J or K lines Plane Select this option if you want surface nodes to be generated equipotentially in a plane Sphere Select this option if you want surface nodes to be generated equipotentially on the surface of a sphere you will be asked to specify the center of the sphere Geometric Ratios Set geometric ratios in the fields provided if you want to grade the zoning instead of equally spacing the nodes Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 303 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Volume ka Create Zoning Generate volume from six surfaces J straight C JK straight IK straight Autozone Geometric Ratio i 000000 This window lets you zone the interior volume of the IJK region you selected from nodes already defined on its six faces lJ straight Select this option if you want to generate the interior volume so that nodes with the same I J indices lie equally spaced along a straight line JK straight Select this option if you want to generate the interior volume so that nodes with the same J K indices lie equally spaced along a straight line
33. 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to remove history data for the selected model at least one model must remain loaded at all times Reduce Press this button to reduce the amount of history data stored for a model History Type Select the type of history you want to view from the following options Gauge Points Variable histories at gauge points Material Mass energy and momentum sums for Summaries each material Part Summaries Mass energy and momentum sums for Energy each Part X momentum Energy balance Y momentum X momentum balance Z momentum Y momentum balance Jetting Analysis Z momentum balance Jetting analysis plots only active if model uses Jetting Single Variable Plots Press this button to compose plots of a single variable Multiple Variable Plots Press this button to compose plots including multiple variables Examine Use the Left Mouse Button to select a point on the graph The corresponding curve label and x and y values are displayed in the Examine panel Integrate Check this box to view integrals of the variables in the current plot Differentiate Check this box to view differentials of the variables in the current plot Min Max Press this button to view maximum and minimum values for the current plot Write textfile uhs Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 159 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates
34. 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Contour Profile Plot E Profile Plot AUTODYN 3D v12 0 from ANSYS 5 mn Oo So _ Co to A 3 E 2 U O 1 0 Ww a x Distance cm Time 8 112E 000 ps LARGE LAGRANGE BENCHMARK TEST Units or a x hg Examine Use Left Mouse button to examine points on Profile Plot Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 129 AUTODYN User Manual This dialog window lets you compose and display a profile plot of a chosen variable along some defined line Define the Line along which the variable is profiled Specify the end points for the line along which the variable is profiled You can do this by specifying the coordinates for the start point and end point of the line lower left Alternatively in 2D you can select this line interactively in the View Panel using the mouse hold shift and use the right mouse button to drag a line across your model Change Variable Press this button to change the variable you want to profile Smoothing Check this box if you want to see a smoothed profile plot Line Color Use this pull down menu to select the line color for your profile plot Write textfile uhs Press this button to write digital history data for the current plot to a text file The text file has an extension uhs and i
35. 296 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing al next to the option in this window Material If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set select the material you want to use to fill your Part from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing S next to the option in this window Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Velocity Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 297 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Transition ia Zoning Transition Transition Transitions along plane C J plane C K plane Lower Upper Transition orientation a O IK pl 4 2 transition oer pe Zone
36. ANSYS E Stati rutur Samel E SteadyState Thermal Ansys E Therma Electr ANSYS GR Trereierk structural ANSYS GB Transient Structural N80 GB Trarcierk Thermal ANSYS B Component Systems id Bardeen Engneering Date OD Forte Bieeare Moder BB vent A Cermarre Save in This field shows the current folder in which the Workbench project tree is saved and the user can select a different folder if required File Name The user defined project name 56 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu File Save As Version This menu is only available when AUTODYN is started outside Workbench MB ANSYS AUTODYN am Import Setup Execution View Options E Plots Open Results File Save eek Pants Cycle Gea Version 5 0 01c Version 5 0 02b Manage Folders Version 6 0 01c Save settings Version 11 0 00a Print Export PostScript Export VRML Fill type a Save Formatted gt Vect OpenFormatted etalLocation 2 ri eral Status 2 mia Of tour I Deto None Eod Pats Contour variable I Unus This option lets you to Save an AUTODYN save file in the format supported by previous versions The formats available are listed and the chosen format should be selected from the list As features and options avail
37. Activate Select this option to initialize an AUTODYN analysis model using the results of an ANSYS Mechanical implicit analysis Results File Select the ANSYS rst results file to be used to initialize the AUTODYN analyses Transfer Type Select the initialization method either the Displacement Only or the Material State option as described below Results Time The result time from the ANSYS Mechanical implicit analysis at which to extract results from the rst file Timestep factor Note that this option is only applicable for the Displacement Only method The initial timestep from the AUTODYN solution is multiplied by the timestep factor The resulting time PVELTM is used together with the nodal displacements from the ANSYS Mechanical analysis to calculate constant nodal velocities These nodal velocities are applied to the AUTODYN model over PVELTM in order to initialize the AUTODYN nodes to the correct positions 200 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Initial Conditions New Modify New Initial Condition Sl Velocity Only C Include Material X velocity 0 000000 cy New Initial Condition O Velocity Only Include Material Material STEEL Initial Density x 7 900000 Zc Radial Velocity oy Symmety Spherical v Angular
38. All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 465 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Matrix WBbodyS i i i a R v K K V y A v K Vv W K v V K d v K V qaaa adaga aaa aa aaga aa a a aaa aaa aaa auaa a aaa g aaau aa aa aaau aaa ws quu auauua aaua u auaa aaa aaa ua a 2 When the model doesn t contain more than 25 parts this window lets you choose which Parts you want to interact by checking boxes in a matrix When a model contains more than 25 Parts the matrix option is not available and will be greyed out If you have a large number of Parts you may find it easy to set interactions using the Add Remove options in the Interactions dialog panel The matrix shown in this panel list the Parts of your model vertically and horizontally This matrix is symmetrical so only the diagonal and lower part of the matrix is shown 466 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check a box if you want the two associated Parts to interact The Remove buttons let you quickly uncheck the boxes for each row of the matrix Press _ pely to apply the changes you make to the matrix Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc
39. All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 467 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Range Define interaction range This window is only available for Gap contact and lets you set the index range of a structured Part that will be checked for interactions For unstructured parts this option is not available For Trajectory contact and for unstructured parts the Interaction by Group option can be used instead to only select a region of a Part for interaction Select Part Select the Part for which you want to set the index range for interactions in this box Interaction Range Enter the index range that you want to be checked for interaction 468 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Friction Define interaction friction coefficients This window is available for Gap contact and lets you set static friction coefficients between two Parts Select Part 1 Select the first of the two Parts you want to set the friction coefficient between in this box Select Part 2 Select the second of the two Parts you want to set the friction coefficient between in this box Friction Coefficient Enter the frictio
40. Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Material 326 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Since you are only filling a node no material fill is done only initial conditions for the node are set i e velocities Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Velocity only Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 327 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Unused Fill Part x Fill Unused Select J and K range to set as Unused From To l From J To J fim K Tok This window lets you fill a block in index space with Unused elements previous materials occupying the elements are removed Enter the index range of the block you want to fill and press va 328 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Composite Parts Fill Composite Composite Shell Interface New From J From K x velocity 0 000000 Y velocity
41. Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 0 0 anim gif Default frame delay in seconds lt space gt file 1 2 name another gif Default frame delay in 1 6 seconds lt space gt file yetanother gif name Default frame delay in seconds lt space gt file name etc Save As This option saves the current sequence file seq Control File Sequence S This pull down menu provides the same functions that are available in the Control Bar Control Bar l4f44i gt gt fl This bar lets you control the playing of the GIF or GFA animation you have loaded Pressing a button on this bar performs the following actions you can type the corresponding Hotkey as an alternative to pressing the a button Button Hotkey Action I lt b Go to the first frame of the animation 44 r Go back one frame gt X Play from the current frame Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 33 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual l Pause at the current frame p This is a toggle button amp S Stop at the current frame b gt a Advance one frame gt I a Go to the last frame of the animation View Bar EEEE This bar only appears when you have loaded a GFA animation The buttons on this bar let you control how you view your GFA animation and work in the same way as the corresponding icons in
42. Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Copy Copy Groups This window lets you create a copy of an existing Group Group List Select the Group that you wish to duplicate Group Name Enter the new name for the copied Group Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 429 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Delete Delete Groups Select group s to be deleted This window lets you delete one or more Groups Select the Groups you want to delete in the list and press a 430 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Apply Apply Boundary Condition to Group all elements 11793 Elements subset 11793 Elements nodeset 4093 Nodes nodeset2 9560 Nodes This window lets you apply a boundary condition to a Group The type of Group and type of boundary condition must be consistent i e you can only apply a nodal boundary condition to a node Group and a face boundary condition to a face Group Group List Select the Group you wish to apply the boundary condition to Boundary Select the boundary condition to be applied to the Group Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Cont
43. Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 323 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill 1 J K Plane Fill Part x Fill Plane Select J and K range to Fill eee ekon Initial Cond Material velocity 0 000000 Y velocity 0 000000 Z velocity 0 000000 Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical Sa v This window lets you fill a J or K plane of the current Part with initial conditions The example shown is for filling a plane input for the other planes is similar Select range to Fill Enter the index for the plane you want to fill and the J and K range to fill in this plane Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box if you want to fill the plane using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window 324 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009
44. Results File Results File beta Cycles Times Start cycle 1000000 End cycle 11000000 Increment 1000000 Select Results Variables Set the frequency at which results files are written out Select Results Variable Press this button to select the grid variables written to the result file History Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 561 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Cycles Times setos J End cycle 11000000 cement E Select Gauge Variables Select Part Summary Variables Set the frequency at which history data is written Select Gauge Variables Select this button to choose which structured and unstructured variables to write to the history data file Select Part Summary Variables Select this button to choose which part summary variables to write to the history data file Capture image Capture image Cycles Times Start cycle 1000000 End cycle 11000000 Increment 11000000 Setup Set the frequency at which automatic image captures are done Print Print Type Energy summary x Cycles Times Start cycle 1000000 End cycle 11000000 Increment 11000000 Print Format Grid Variables Set the frequency at which printed data is written 562 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights r
45. Select Plane From To l ae From J ToJ Fon K 1 Toks Select motion Free Lagrange Fixed Euler Equal Spacing Equal Spacing Y Equal Spacing Z This window lets you apply an ALE motion constraint to a plane of nodes in IJK space The example shown is for applying a motion constraint to an plane input for the other planes is similar Select Plane Enter the index for the plane and the J K range for the nodes to which you want to apply the motion constraint in the fields provided Select motion Select the motion constraint you want to apply from the list provided 386 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Motions Node E Apply ALE Motions Select Node From From J From K Select motion Free Lagrange Fixed Euler Equal Spacing Equal Spacing Y Equal Spacing Z This window lets you apply an ALE motion constraint to a node in IJK space Select Node Enter the I J K indices for the node to which you want to apply the motion constraint in the fields provided Select motion Select the motion constraint you want to apply from the list provided Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 387 of A
46. Select a polygon and euler part POLY_1 Euler 1 All FCT 2 All This window lets you define a new interaction set for Polygon coupling Enter name of new interaction Enter the name you want to use for the new interaction set in this field Select a Polygon and Euler Part Select the Polygon in the left box that you want to be coupled to the Euler Part you select in the right box Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 505 AUTODYN User Manual Euler Lagrange 3D Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Euler Lagrange Coupling type C None Rigid Fully Coupled Cover fraction limit Euler subcycling f Gn tf Off Ambient Pressure 0 000000 Euler Lagrange Shell interactions Select Thickness Joins Review Weak coupling settings Filename Browse This panel lets you set up interactions coupling between 3D Lagrange Parts and Euler Parts Coupling Type Select the coupling type you want to use None no coupling is defined Rigid Fill Parts are used to define rigid boundaries for Euler Fully Coupled Lagrange Parts interact with Euler Parts dynamically Weak Coupling A fast method for having Lagrange and Euler Parts interact dynamically Cover fraction limit Enter the cover fraction limi
47. a new directory will be created in the directory where the simulation file is located This directory will have the name lt ident gt _adres For example the results files from a simulation with model name ben3d1_0 ad will be stored in a sub directory with name ben3d1_adres ben3d1_0 ad 315KB AD File 02 03 2006 11 38 Siben3ad1 adres Fie Folder 23 05 2006 13 56 Results files have extension adres and the model name is appended with two numbers e The first number is the cycle from which the simulation began e The second number being the current cycle number For example a results file ben3d1_10 25 adres indicates that the results file contains data at cycle 25 from the simulation ben3d1 that began at cycle 10 Note that the start cycle for each sequence of results files is stored in a file lt ident gt _ lt cycle gt ad_base For example ben3d1_10 ad_base This base file is essential for post processing using results files and must not be deleted The base file contains data required for producing graphic output that for efficiency is not repeated in each of the Results Files To use the results files for post processing of a simulation the option under the File menu option should be 568 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Import Setup E gt New Open O
48. aie e AUTODYNID E 1 fe Bate Optia tam Coty Draamics Pusia ansi Tome Tome Tok 3 Teme a Tames Taho i Tork 7 tsen Teses Tests in Tee etl Teien Then Ta sl Tesi a5 merti Crete 0 Tee 0 DDE 000 ra Umer Tast 18 As previously stated the new algorithm allows easy decomposition of complicated coupled models which include Euler FCT and unstructured Lagrange Parts The model below contains a brick structure in which an explosion is occurring The brick structure is modeled using Lagrangian parts whilst the explosion in air is modeled using an Euler FCT part Here only part of the Euler FCT part is shown for illustration purposes the Euler FCT part extends above the brick structure fe Woot fip benn w Golo ow Demak ate BEEBI PE ALTODYW20 6 1 Bate Options tam Catry Dpaamics Bitch MORAA wooo TEER 410 AT E fan Fo seis oe Sc Eivin Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 553 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The Decomposition Set window dialog will contain all of the parts and by default they will all be highlighted nnn a Automatic Decomposition By choosing decomposing the model over 4 tasks the various parts can be assigned to the available processors whilst ensuring efficient parallel computations Aerie tiara Conti
49. coordinates of your gauges Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 359 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Gauges Move Unstructured Modify Gauge Points Move Gauge s comm ff This window lets you relocate one gauge point Gauge Number Enter the number of the gauge you want to relocate in this field gauges are assigned numbers in the order in which you define them Element Node Select whether you want to associate gauge points with element or nodes New Position Enter the X Y Z coordinates for the new position of the gauge 360 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Gauges Delete Unstructured Modify Gauge Points Delete Gauge s This window lets you delete one or more gauges Enter the range of the gauge numbers you want to delete and press v Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 361 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Solvers Parts Solvers Structured Pressing the Solvers button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog for structured Parts in th
50. guarantee the transfer of bending over the spot weld 444 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Piesi uro _apotaati Pasini ura apoie Gaw x Op 44 x Tere 0 OE ODD me Tene 6 CE 000 re Ueda rem hg me Lede teen fig re After failure of the spot weld the spot weld rigid body will be removed from the analysis model as can be seen above Within an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system an effective area can be input for spot welds thus the breakable criteria can be defined in terms of stress This stress is converted to force when transferred into AUTODYN Spot welds of zero length are permitted However if such spot welds are defined as breakable the above failure is modified since local normal and shear directions cannot be defined A modified criterion using global forces is used instead Jar d df yi st s lt 1 0 where dfx dfy and dfz are the global force differences across the spot weld Notes 1 A spot weld is equivalent to a rigid body and as such multiple nodal boundary conditions cannot be applied to spot welds 2 Currently analysis models containing spot welds cannot be run in parallel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 445 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Pub
51. of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials Materials Material Definition New Load Copy Save Modify Delete Review Library Current material library standard mlb fe Update Library This panel lets you define the materials you want to use in your model Material List The box at the top of this panel lists the materials you have currently defined for your model You can select materials in this list New Press this button to define a new material Modify Press this button to modify parameters for the selected material Copy Press this button to copy material component data from an existing material to either a new material or another existing material Delete Press this button to delete one or more materials from your model Review 188 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to review the parameters for the selected material in a browser window Library The default material library is standard mlb This contains all the material data provided by Century Dynamics Press this button if you want to change the material library to some other material library you have obtained or created Load Press this button to load materials from your curre
52. 0 000000 Z velocity 0 000000 This window lets you define a shell as a composite shell consisting of a number of different layers The composite allows efficient modeling of thin composite materials which are subjected to structural rather than shock type loading New Press this button to create a new shell layer definition Modify Press this button to modify an existing shell layer definition Delete Press this button to delete an existing shell layer definition Review Press this button to review the existing shell layer definition Range Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 329 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the J and K range of the shell to apply the selected layer definition Velocity Enter the initial velocity of the shell 330 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Composite New Composite Shell Interface X x velocity 0 000000 Y velocity 000000 Z velocity 0 000000 This window lets you create an existing layer definition Number of Layers Select the number of layers for the composite layer definition Layer definition name Enter a name for the layer definition Material
53. 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 AUTODYN User Manual Create New Part E xj Part name af Projectile Solver Lagrange Euler 2D Mult material Euler 3D Multi material Euler Ideal Gas SPH Beam Fill Definition Manual Part wizard This window lets you create a new structured Part Part Name Enter your name for the Part in this field Solver Select the Solver you want to use for the Part Definition You can select to define your Part manually or using the Part Wizard the Part Wizard cannot be used for SPH or Beam Solvers so these options are not displayed for these solvers Manual If you choose this option fields appear for you to specify the maximum J and K range for your Part left window above After pressing ov you return to the Parts panel where you can define your Part manually using the Zoning and Fill buttons Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 219 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 220 Part Wizard If you choose this option you advance through three more dialog windows that guide you through the complete definition of your part using one of a number of pre defined geometries Predefs The first dialog window l
54. 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Heading Enter a heading for your model in this field Headings appear in plots and other output for your model Description Enter a more detailed description of your model here if you want Symmetry Select the dimension 2D or 3D and symmetry you want to use for your model In 2D you must choose either Axial or Planar symmetry In 3D you do not need to choose a symmetry but you can optionally select X Y and or Z symmetry e g if you select X symmetry then the plane X 0 is assumed to be a symmetry plane Units Select the units of length mass and time you want to use for your model The default units mm mg ms will give good results with small rounding errors for most models US Customary Units US customary units have been added to units options when creating a new model These are e Length unit inch or foot e Mass unit pound These units can be written in short as in ft and Ib One of the three time units can be used in conjunction with the US customary units microsecond millisecond or second Note they cannot be used together with Metric Units For example you cannot use inch for length unit and kilogram for the mass unit The following table shows the unit for each type of physical variables in the US customary system in ce ft Ib us Length ies es se Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential in
55. 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Gauges Add ka Modify Gauge Points Add Gauge s Point C Aray f Block Fixed f Moving XyZ Space WK Space x co ordinate 0 000000 Y co ordinate 0 000000 Z co ordinate 0 000000 This window lets you add gauges to your model A gauge is a location where time histories of selected variables are recorded during a calculation Point Array Block Select whether you want to define a single gauge Point a 2D array of gauges Array or a 3D block of gauges Block Fixed Moving Select whether you want the gauge s to be fixed in space or move with the flow as if imbedded in the material XYZ IJK Space Select whether you want to specify your gauge locations in real space XYZ or index space IJK Depending on your selections the remaining fields will ask you to specify the X Y Z coordinates of your gauges or the I J K indices of the elements in which your gauges are to be placed 356 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Gauges Move ka Modify Gauge Points Move Gauge s Gauge no yZ Space lJK Space x co ordinate 0 000000 Y co ordinate 0 000000 Z co ordinate 0 000000 This window lets you relocate one gauge point Gauge
56. 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 277 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Pack Fill When SPH parts are selected in the parts menu pressing the Pack Fill button displays the following panel in the lower region of the parts menu Select SPH object s to delete or pack BIRD 516 sph nodes Target 0 sph nodes Projectile 0 sph nodes Pack Selected Object s Delete All SPH Delete Nodes In Object Delete In XY Box Delete Single Node This panel allows you to fill SPH objects with SPH nodes Pack Selected Object s Press this button to pack the selected objects with SPH nodes You will be prompted for the fill material the SPH node size and velocity to use for the packing operation Delete All SPH Press this button to delete all SPH nodes in your model Delete Nodes in Object Press this to delete the SPH nodes in the selected SPH objects Delete in XY Box Press this to delete the SPH nodes in a box defined by the XYZ coordinates of the origin and the size of the box in the X Y and Z directions Delete Single Node Press this to delete a single SPH node by specifying its local IJK index You can use the Examine option to interactively select SPH nodes and determine their index 278 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential i
57. 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Create SPH Geometry x Object name C Box C Cylinder 6 Whole Half C Quarter Eighth gt origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 000000 Outer Radius 0 000000 Inner Radius 0 000000 Principal Direction 11 11 0 000000 lilies 0 000000 Wes 0 000000 Rot About 11 0 000000 You may define either a whole half quarter or eighth sphere by selecting the appropriate option To define the sphere enter XYZ coordinates of the sphere origin and an outer radius You may specify a hollow sphere by entering an inner radius The orientation of the sphere is defined by a principal direction vector and a rotation about this vector When the sphere is defined a wire frame representation is shown on the screen together with an arrow displaying the principal vector direction Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 393 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Geometry Copy Transform SPH Geometry x New Name Xx translation 000000 Y translation 000000 Z translation 000000 This window lets you create a copy of the currently selected SPH object Enter the name of the new SPH object and also an offset in the X Y and Z direction 394 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential info
58. 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 41 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual application by double clicking on the AUTODYN system Setup cell The mesh and Named selections will be transferred to AUTODYN With Version 12 the link generated between the AUTODYN and Mesh system is not persistent anymore This means that with every update of the workflow system the definitions made in AUTODYN material filling boundary condition assignment etc are lost and have to be re applied Therefore at release 12 we recommend using the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system to link to CAD geometry and generate a mesh for use in AUTODYN where loads constraints and material assignments are maintained after any change to the geometry or mesh Notes e Connections defined in the Mesh system will not be transferred to the AUTODYN application e Material assignments Boundary Conditions and Loads defined in the AUTODYN application will be lost during the update and will have to be re applied FEModeler Legacy and third party FE model data can be imported into the FEModeler system in Component toolbox This data can be transferred into AUTODYN via a Mesh system or an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system Note Direct transfer of data from the FEModeler application into AUTODYN is not possible at release 12 Data Transferred by linking different systems to
59. 420mm x 297mm AO AO paper size 1189mm x 841mm Width Height Margin Use these fields to specify the width and height and margin of EPS size output if this option is selected 62 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Color Subdivision This pull down menu lets you select how the color is interpolated for polylines and surfaces in 2D and 3D with per vertex color or lighting of 3D surfaces When subdivision is enabled Precompute or Postcompute the subdivision proceeds until a color tolerance is reached This adaptive method gives the best quality results without subdividing primitives with small color gradients None flat No color interpolation is performed The output polyline and triangle primitives are drawn with constant color per segment or per facet Incoming vertex colors are averaged to produce the segment or facet color where necessary Precompute The OutputVPS module subdivides line segments and triangles that have per vertex color from data mapping or as the result of lighting 3D surfaces The subdivision generates many smaller primitives with linearly interpolated color Precomputing the subdivision increases the output file size and the subdivision cannot be changed during printing Postcompute Special interpolation macros are wri
60. 5 AUTODYN User Manual viii Parts Boundary NOdC cccccseessssseecceeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeesesseeeaeeeeeees 350 Parts Boundary Clear cccccccceeeeesssccccceeeeeeeeeesesceeeeeeeeeseeesessseeeeaeeeeees 351 Parts Boundary Apply Interactively ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 352 Parts Boundary Clear Interactively cccceeeesesseececeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeees 353 UGS i aoei ba Steins ies cede eid Gud das Ea edad aiaiai ai 354 Palts GaUGGS 2c ctticiets ii ctatcice E lela ie rales ad 354 Parts Gauges Ad ccc ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeennneeeeeeeess 356 Parts Gauges OV Sse ee ee ee ae ee he 357 Parts Gauges DeIGlG Aastra acai aa aia sonia pnt te tats 358 Parts Gauges Add Unstructured ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeees 359 Parts Gauges Move Unstructured ccccceeeeeeseeccceeeeeeeeeetsseeeeeeeeeeees 360 Parts Gauges Delete Unstructured cccceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeteenneeeeeeeeees 361 S19 Ve fo RNR DAP eae ee et O OREO CREE PEO AER OO OORT OREN OER OPP Cae ERT EME ME OO E 362 Parts Solvers Structured ican ca acca A anata vasa attains 362 Parts Solvers Structured Type cccceceeeeeeesseeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 363 Parts Solvers Structured Solution 2D Shells 0 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 364 Parts Solvers Structured Sol
61. ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Any nodes faces or elements that are enclosed by the polygon are highlighted and the user is prompted to accept the selection of nodes or faces These are then added to the current group E ANSYS AUTOOYN Fle lapat Setup Execution Wew Options Help SARIS a BH CEREN fol Lok E Va tl anus D AD aa m AUTOON v12 0lrom ANSYS AN F Sielce tendeiro for Luge 30 models 1 Pit Groups Mather cale Oe Groups Detinition tera lA Boundary to Grou Gye 0 Apply H p Time 0 000E 000 ps s Full Element Group Unite om g pe OBLIQUE IMPACT OF STEEL ON TOPALUMINUM 4 Transtorm Group Zoning 4Group Operations For face groups an alternative surface selection method exists The selection is made by interactively picking a face element in the graphics window Any faces that are joined to the selected face and have a normal angle between the two faces of less than a user specified value are then added to the group For example selecting an element on the side of a cube would add all faces on that side of the cube By setting the surface angle cut off to a sufficiently large value curved surfaces may also be selected as shown in the example below where the curved surface of the projectile has been added to a group Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential informati
62. AUTODYN Node Coordinates The nodal coordinates are transferred Mesh Elements The mesh elements are transferred noting that Pyramid elements are not supported within AUTODYN so these are converted into two tetrahedra Body Definitions The definitions of bodies in the Workbench are imported as Parts in AUTODYN In addition for Meshing Simulation and Finite Element Model Objects the following are transferred Parts Definitions 42 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The definitions of parts both multi body parts and single body parts are shown as Components in AUTODYN Named Selection The named selections are represented as Groups in AUTODYN Note that the face named selection is transferred as a face group all other named selections are transferred as node groups Unit Setup All models are transferred to AUTODYN in units of mm mg ms Material Associations Each Body AUTODYN Part transferred is assigned a separate material Shell thickness Shell parts will be assigned with the thickness as defined in the Workbench object An initial condition will be created for each part Beam Cross Sections and Orientations The beam cross sections associated to elements and their orientations are transferred and applied correspondingly In order to updat
63. AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Copy Copy Host Configuration Set This window lets you copy an existing Host Configuration Set to a new or existing Host Configuration Set Select the Host Configuration Set you want to copy in the top pull down menu In the lower pull down menu select the Host Configuration Set to which you want to copy the data to copy to a new Configuration Set select lt New gt then in the Parallel Processing panel rename the Configuration Set to the name you want to use Press all to perform the copy 542 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Sub domains ia Define Subdomains PROJECTILE l sec 3 J sec 2 K sec 4 TARGET I sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGET2 l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGET3 l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 PROJECTILE IMAx 9 JMAX 5 KMA 15 Define Number of Subdomains in Index Space Number of l sections V Dividing Planes Dividing plane 1 Dividing plane 2 Number of J sections iV Dividing Planes J Dividing plane 1 Number of K sections I Dividing Planes K Dividing plane 1 Dividing plane 2 Dividing plane 3 This window lets you decompose the Parts of your model into sub domains for parallel processing SPH parts are decomposed automatically You c
64. Block command also permits extra air space to be created beyond the input region For example to allow a pressure wave to propagate over the tallest building in the model and interact with the buildings behind Fill Block can be used to create additional air space above the building Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 315 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Fill Block Implicit IMPLICIT Fill type IMAX JMAX KMAX Maximum I J K indices of input region XMIN YMIN ZMIN Minimum co ordinates of input region corresponding to the node at J K 1 DX DY DZ X Y Z zone dimensions for input region XRAT YRAT ZRAT Ratios used to extend grid beyond the original input region For example if XMAX is the maximum X coordinate of the input region and XRAT 0 5 the generated grid would be extended to XMAX 0 5 XMAX XMIN in the X direction with geometric zoning being used automatically for cells above XMAX The maximum index of the part will be larger than the IMAX defined in the data file hence extra elements are created to include the extended air space SIE Unit dependent specific internal energy for the air 2 068x10 is usually OK for the mm mg ms units IFILL Fill flag of each cell in input region K varying faster than J J varying faster than I Input 20 cells per line of data IF
65. Contour scales box For example if a maximum value is entered which is lower than the highest value present in the model a red area will appear corresponding to all values above the maximum that has been set Selecting Fix scales lets you fix the current maximum and minimum values This is particularly useful when you want to generate a slideshow from multiple cycles of a single model The red area may be removed by selecting Truncate Opacity This slider lets you set the opacity for your view An opacity of 1 0 means you cannot see inside the grid An opacity of 0 0 is equivalent to turning hidden line removal off i e you can see everything inside the grid Slice Plane Plot The Slice Plane feature is a visual tool to take a section through a model at an arbitrary angle Results values as selected under the contour option are contoured on the selected slice through the model We recommend that you use the slice box feature in conjunction with the Opacity feature of the Contour plot to obtain best results Contour Settings x x Tearwboarad ary E das I none m2 slale ef Gisele e Clea Bisley pt i i a Fason a3 aor zi O anaman teu x Example slice plane plot showing the damage inside a concrete target 128 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published
66. EE 537 Ee 2 ee een ee a ee Oe ee eee er ee reer ere eee rere ere eee 537 Parallel Add OO coc ce ce ea eek Seen Ce oh 540 Parallel S GOO issue nena ua ca nonin aia A 542 Pal allel SUD COMAINS bsesesesc sesicccncesissadet cece cesnneidtad ite cn sed enaienditid tebe sandiaieceses 543 Parallel Task Assignment i255 censors ttre teet A 545 Parallel Automatic DecOMmpOSitiON g z ci2e2 ceseigte vet stes eet eaeseaet gies tate eet 549 Automatic decomposition of Euler FCT parts cccccccecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 551 Parallel Decomposition of beam Parts ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeees 555 OUMU iaa rarer aero ee eee eeneR Papen cee Pater tee Parente Darel nee en ats aren cen Per en ee Paree reeorre tr eeree 557 COUTOUL an et tinte cabal E A a ole ac taetti cia alate taal 557 Output Part Summary Variables w cecewaieeienannuenenaknneienaies 564 O tp ts Res lts File S moarne a A itateed rod 567 MSY MANS ry ccc nena A RD Ee Re a oN Ss Ro ne Rh en Se ns 571 User Vanables cx isi ctecttatttse atta e a ei tie A alles tet 571 User Variables Add Modify ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 572 Clclgige eee eee ee ee ee ee 574 CONMGIS aaa serene alte ee alice eesti ts Stadia ita Gaede Ss eaa et ai eee aS eae tae 574 Controls Mass scaling si ica scicessles Se stheidecubns destheescaaieeidesthndiioiomadsiien dsaiieis 584 Controls Global Erosion 1 22 22 25 sad cic cndececden deca
67. EL 4 Update Intel Fortran 5 10 1 SUSE 10 Intel Fortran 10 1 32 Bit Linux RedHat Enterprise Linux AS release 4 Update 5 64 Bit Linux x86 64 SUSE Professional 10 64 Bit Linux Itanium Il RedHat Enterprise Linux AS release 4 Update 5 Third Party Software Requirements for Parallel System Parallel Environment R Windows XP Pro 32 bit MPI 1 6 1 Windows Vista 32 bit Windows Vista 64 bit edHat EL 4 Update 5 HP MPI SUSE 10 S Windows XP Pro 64 bit MPI 2 4 2 SE 10 Su See Chapter 1 1 Prerequisites for Running Distributed ANSYS of the Configuring Distributed ANSYS section of the Installation and Licensing Documentation for the version of HP MPI that is supplied as part of the installation 24 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Initialization Settings AUTODYN is installed with a pre configured file called autodyn ini which is in the users Application Data directory in the sub folder Ansys v120 AUTODYN This is the contents of the file after installation AUTODYN_initialization_file application_window_width 1000 application_window_height 700 message_window_ visibility 0 manual_refresh_default 0 background_color 1 hardware_acceleration 1 reset_plot_flags 0 plot_wireframe 0 plot_perspective
68. FCT calculation thus saving analysis time Also some speedup would be expected over a normal coupled solution for a single FCT and then Lagrange calculation Creating the Field files The Field files are created as a field edit when an FCT or Euler type simulation is being carried out The user should press Output on the navigation bar and open the Field output part of the dialog panel Under this menu there are three options namely Cycles Times and Set_part The cycle and time options work in the traditional manner of all edits in AUTODYN and allow the user to select the frequency of the Field file output The third menu set_part allows the user to select which part the pressure data will be taken from and the I J and K range The file format only allows one block of data to be written If this information is not given by the user then the entire range of the first ECT or Euler part found will be written to the Field file A geometry data field is only produced when a problem is started or restarted and this cycle coincides with a field edit Using the Weak Interactions The coupling option Weak Coupling is included under the Euler Lagrange interaction tab after Interaction is selected from the navigation bar The Euler Lagrange Shell interactions need to be set to chose which Lagrange type part are included in the coupling and how shells interact Under the weak coupling settings the Ambient Pressure should be entered This pressure is
69. IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 473 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Retain inertia of eroded nodes Check this box if you want to retain the inertial of eroded nodes otherwise eroded nodes are removed from the model Prevent erosion of degenerate elements Check this box if you want the interaction calculation to be used to stop elements from becoming degenerate This option only works for Lagrange volume elements Warning Activating this option can lead to unphysical results particularly if a large Gap size is used Interaction by Part 474 Add Press this button to set interactions between Parts Add All Press this button to set all Parts to interact with each other Remove Press this button to remove interactions between Parts Remove All Press this button to remove all interactions between Parts Matrix Press this buttons to set interactions using a Part matrix Range Press this button to set the index range of each Part that will be checked for interactions Friction Press this button to set static friction coefficients between different Parts Review Press this button to review all your interaction settings Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 A
70. Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select this option to merge joined unstructured nodes into a single unstructured node Plot Joined Nodes Check this box to plot a symbol at every joined node Plot Joined Parts Check this box to show which Parts are joined to a selected Part a box appears to let you select a Part Remove joined faces from plot Selecting this option results in continuous contours across joined faces and also removed joined faces from other types of plots Improved Rendering Across Joined Nodes There is now an option to remove joined faces from rendered images under the Joins Settings option Selecting this option results in continuous contours across joined faces and also removed joined faces from other types of plots Contour plot including joined faces Contour plot with remove joined faces set ANODINO 4 0 DETA fore Coury Dyprarecs ANODINO HO NETA tore Comune Dyers Material plot using opacity Material plot using opacity with remove Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 443 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual joined faces set Bonded Face Connections Bonded contact allows the nodes of an unstructured Part to be bonded to a face of another unstructured Part Bonded contact alleviates the requirement that for joining
71. Number Enter the number of the gauge you want to relocate in this field gauges are assigned numbers in the order in which you define them XYZ IJK Space Select whether you want to specify your gauge locations in real space XYZ or index space IJK New Position Enter the X Y Z coordinates or I J K indices for the new position of the gauge Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 357 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Gauges Delete This window lets you delete one or more gauges Enter the range of the gauge numbers you want to delete and press a 358 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Gauges Add Unstructured Modify Gauge Points Add Gauge s G Pork Cay C Element C Node This window lets you add gauges to an unstructured part A gauge is a location where time histories of selected variables are recorded during a calculation Point Array Select whether you want to define a single gauge Point or a 2D array of gauges Array Element Node Select whether you want to associate gauge points with element or nodes Coordinates The remaining fields will ask you to specify the X Y Z
72. SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 533 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Sphere kal Define detonations Define Sphere 0 000000 0 000000 000000 Radius 0 000000 Initiation Time 0 000000 V Limit range of application Range will Include Exclude PROJECTILE WK range From To l From J To J From K e To K This window lets you define a detonation sphere detonation propagates radially inward and outward from the surface of the sphere Center Coordinates Enter the coordinates for the center of your sphere in the fields provided Radius Enter the radius of your sphere in this field Initiation Time Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application 534 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented Range will Include Exclude region For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the exc
73. Select Part This list contains all the shell parts in the model that are selected for coupling with Euler If you select a part the coupling thickness and direction of the thickening for that part is shown below Coupling Thickness This shows the coupling thickness for the selected part To modify the coupling thickness enter the new value and press the Apply button For the coupling methodology to function correctly the artificial thickness of a shell must be at least twice the dimension of the largest cell size in the surrounding Euler grid Direction This shows the direction the shell is thickened in for the selected part To modify the thickening direction select the desired direction and press the Apply button The coupling thickness can be applied on both sides of the midplane of the shell Centred or applied to one side of the shell where Positive is in the direction of the normal of the shell 510 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Review If you select the review button an html summary is opened that displays which shell parts have been included in the Euler coupling the thickness and direction for these shell parts and also the thickened shell joined matrix You can also view the thickened shells by switching on Shell thickness in the Plots pa
74. Shell thickness in the Plots panel and choosing Artificial Shell Coupling Thickness in the Shell Thickness Settings panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 513 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Weak Coupling Introduction Within AUTODYN S3D there is a facility for the application of a pressure field in 3D space to Lagrange type parts as a boundary condition The pressures in 3D space are contained in a sequence of Field files the format of which is described below Also included is an additional feature that allows the user to create these fields when using either the FCT or the Euler processors Weak Lagrange Coupling can be seen as equivalent to the current FCT Lagrange couple but without the feedback from the Lagrange type parts back into the FCT part This weak coupling assumes that any deflections in the Lagrange model are small and should only be used in such cases The current implementation only considers the possibility of mapping pressure data and applies this to the Lagrange boundary surfaces as nodal forces The pressures will be applied to all wetted surfaces of Lagrange type subgrids within the volume described by the pressure files The advantage over the current LCT Lagrange coupling is that multiple Lagrange calculations can be carried out on one
75. Subnet aptens eve to owahe sodiy aieia pinga oi adet badei w daii ROO WTO PLATE au Note that Group Contact is additive to Part contact Selecting a Part for contact results in all external faces in that Part being checked for contact Group contact should be used to add additional external faces from Parts that have been excluded from contact in the Part interaction matrix Group contact is only applicable to faces of unstructured Parts and doesn t include friction Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 493 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Euler Lagrange 2D Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Euler Lagrange Select Euler Lagrange Coupling Type C Automatic polygon free C Polygons This panel lets you set up interactions coupling between 2D Lagrange Parts and Euler Parts Select Euler Lagrange Coupling Type Select the type of coupling you want to muse for Euler Lagrange interactions None Do not compute any Euler Lagrange coupling Automatic Let AUTODYN set up coupling automatically Polygons Set up interactions manually using Polygons Automatic coupling is recommended if you want all Lagrange Parts to interact with all Euler Parts and you have no Shell Parts If you want more control in defining which Parts should be coupled or have She
76. User Manual Outputs Results Files The capability to output results files which contain a reduced amount of information is available in AUTODYN 3D This allows the post processing of large simulations on computers with limited resources Results Files cannot be used for restarting a problem The frequency of the results files is independent of the SAVE files The control for results file output is located in the Output panel under Results Files Define Output lInterrupt Refresh Save Cycles C Times Satoe Edge vj _ _ E OD Select Variables Review Variables Results File End time Select Results Variables History Capture image Print Log file on Call EXEDIT Field output l From here the frequency of results file output and the variable to save into the file are selected Note that only a limited set of results variables are selected by default Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 567 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select Results File Variables x Sela Vanables for Retuts Output F z 7 BEND MOM 1 T BEND MOM 2 F BEND MOM 1 C EDOT FM Evron F Ezzp0T F e amp xyDorT M ev2por F ESDOT F DIVERGENCE E STRAIN I TOA 21 active variables When a simulation is performed with the results file option switched on
77. User Manual Plots Plots Plots Select Parts Cycle fo 7 1 VOLUME VOLUME 11098 C 2 VOLUME VOLUME 100000 C Select plot type for selected part s Fill type Additional components C Grid 2 FE Vectors 2 Material Location ar ita 2 C Material Status 2 7 pues m Contour 2 I Detonation gt I None Erodednodes 2 Contour variable C gran regions L Kes ABS VEL gt Polygons 2 Change variable m Grd F eam sections Shellthickness 2f 7 Profile View range IV Legend gt I Mat direction gt f f Marker 2 Mirror T Shell normals gt f F in plane x 4 B srl lement gt in plane y TA I inplanez 0 Part Highlight gt f This panel lets you set up what you want to see in the View panel Cycle This pull down menu lets you choose which cycle you want to view for the current model Ident Select part s Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 105 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This box lists the Parts in the model Operations performed in the Plots panel will only be applied to the Part s you select Fill type These options let you select the basic fill type you want to view Select only one fill type Additional components This option let you view additional components in your plot Check the boxes alongside the additional components you wa
78. Z velocity Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical v X This window lets you quickly fill multiple Parts Each selected Part must be filled in its entirety Fill Parts The top box displays a list of Parts that you can select to fill Below this box is a pull down menu that lets you choose the type of Parts from which you want to make your selection you can only fill Parts of the same type at the same time Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box if you want to fill the Parts using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 333 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Material If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set select the material you want to use to fill your Part from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing se next to the option in this window Parameters If yo
79. a line in index space Surface Press this button to generate the coordinates of an index plane Volume Press this button to define the coordinates within the current IJK Range Transformations These options let you translate rotate and scale your zoning Press to reveal the following buttons Translate Press this button to translate zoning Rotate Press this button to rotate zoning Scale Press this button to scale zoning Operations These options let you perform various operations on your zoning Press to reveal the following buttons Copy Press this button to copy zoning from an existing Part to the current Part Delete Press this button to delete zoning Save Press this button to temporarily save your zoning Restore Press this button to restore zoning you have temporarily saved Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 281 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Box ka Create Predef Zoning x origin Y origin Z origin OK DY 000000 DZ 000000 l Grade zoning in l direction f Grade zoning in J direction V Grade zoning in K direction Fixed size dz 0 000000 Tines K Centred Lowerk C UpperK This window lets you generate a box with its axes parallel to the X Y and Z axes Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates of
80. affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Velocity Vector Gauge Point Boundary Joins Axes Detonation History Graphs Lets you view histories of Gauge points and Material Part and Energy summaries Slideshow View Options Help Plots E slelis Plot settings gt History Graphs Slideshow gt Setup Performance Profiler Compose slides View slides Lets you create and organize slideshows animations Performance Profiler Brings up a performance profiler that lets you monitor your calculation Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 93 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu View Slideshow Setup Setup Slideshow Drecto D projectile penetration_files dp0 ATD H Sideshow prefix Use curent model name Newt slide number m IV Automatic numbering ot M Use OpenGL Fix side sze sewa Ooo Seo Lo This window lets you set parameters for creating a slideshow Directory Press E next to the Directory box to browse to the directory in which you want to save your slideshow Slideshow prefix Enter a slideshow prefix in this field or check Use current model name to use the current Ident as the slideshow prefix This prefix is used for all image files created for the slideshow Next slide number Enter a number for the next slide
81. and Y axes Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole or Half This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow ogive If you choose a hollow ogive you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the ogive Origin Enter the X and Y coordinates for the center of your ogive in the fields provided End Radius Enter the end radius of your ogive in this field Ogive Radius Enter your ogive radius in this field Principal Direction Select the direction of the principal axis for your ogive from the pull down menu Wedge 224 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ia Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Circle Ogive IE Rhombus Quad Define Geometry Wedge Minimum radius r i 0 000000 Maximum radius R 0 000000 This predef is a wedge with its lower edge lying on the X axis The wedge angle is automatically set by AUTODYN This predef is useful for running 1D cylindrical or spherical symmetric problems in 2D Minimum radius Enter the minimum radius of the wedge this cannot be zero Maximum radius Enter the maximum radius of the wedge Rhombus Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains propr
82. and faces as shown in the left hand figure below These properties are used in the 3D Euler solvers for coupled simulations Exact Geometry Coupling The coupling can be chosen to be fully automatic 2D 3D or by means of polygons 2D Polygon coupling This coupling technique is available in 2D to set up an Euler Lagrange interaction where one or more Polygons are defined and the polygon points are manually attached to nodes on the surface of the Lagrange Parts that interact with Euler All structured Lagrangian element types can be coupled to Euler using polygons Unstructured parts cannot be coupled to Euler using polygons in that case the automatic coupling needs to be used Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 499 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Fixed anchor points Automatic coupling This coupling technique is available in 2D as well as in 3D AUTODYN will automatically setup the Euler Lagrange interactions and the only thing the user has to define is which parts interact with Euler Automatically all outside surface segments of all selected Lagrangian parts are generated and coupled to Euler In 2D the automatic coupling is only available for structured and unstructured Lagrangian volume elements In 3D the automatic coupling is available for structured and unstructured Lagrangian vo
83. and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Load Open history file wai OND 3 ch Bonds O Autodyn My Recent Documents mee o Files of type histo files his Cancel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 177 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Open history file Look in ATO 04m ben3d1 sum My Network File name ben3d1 sum v Open ie pi Files of type summary files sum Cancel This window lets you load history files for plotting History data is stored in two types of files his These files contain history data for the gauge points defined for a model sum These files contain history data for summary plots Material Summaries Part Summaries Energy etc Depending on the plot type you have chosen this window lets you navigate your file system to find his or sum files for loading 178 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Slides Compose Slideshow Directory Search Pattern C AUTODYN slides ben3d1 gif Browse Refresh cerama_O002 gif 0 Shuffle down cerama OO03 qif O cerama O04 git 0 Shuffle up
84. and processing is directly linked to the Parts in the model Each structured Part is a grid or group of SPH nodes that a particular solver operates on AUTODYN offers many tools for the generation of structured Parts as will be described below Unstructured Parts For unstructured parts an alternative Unstructured approach to storing and processing information relating to the mesh is used for the solvers The basic entities needed in the simulation are the Nodes Elements Faces Joints etc In this scheme these are stored in unique and independent global Entity lists where an entity is a node element face join etc Connectivity between entities is determined by cross referencing to the appropriate global entity list The data associated with 212 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual each entity is also stored in a manner most efficient for solving the equations and does not need to follow a set structure order A global list of all elements relating to unstructured Parts is maintained Each element is given a unique identifying number from one to total number of elements Each element also has a user element number associated with it for the purposes of model manipulation and user identification Each element will have a list of variables associated with it the nu
85. autodyn ini Application Window Settings Width 1000 Height 700 Message window Message window visible Hardware Acceleration Settings V Use openGL acceleration for graphics window V Use openGL acceleration for slides Plot Settings Plot wireframe Use perspective Reset plot flags for new model Remove joins from plot Use manual refresh Plot Background V Use graded background Background color Black White Miscellaneous Settings iV Open new browser window for html summary Use pre post license only change will take affect after restart Interactivity Default mouse action Rotate C Zoom Translate Beta Options Enable beta features Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 101 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Options Pause License If you are working with a project in Workbench which contains an AUTODYN system linked to an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system you will not be able to open and work in both applications simultaneously in shared licensing mode or when the license server only has one solver license available For example if you want to generate a new mesh in the meshing application then you will need to close the AUTODYN application to release the license for the meshing application to use As an alternative the user can
86. cannot be de selected This is because the memory for these variables is always allocated even if the variable is not being used in a Part For the unstructured solvers the full list of potential variables that can be used is presented Only a small number of variables are pre selected as commonly used variables The selection of additional variables is up to the user and must be made Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 559 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual prior to execution of the model at cycle zero Only those variables selected will be available for output contour examine etc Note that on execution if a particular combination of element type and material requires a variable to be saved that has not been selected AUTODYN will automatically add this to the list Also note that the unstructured solves some of the variables are never allocated physical memory instead they are reconstructed from other variables that are allocated and stored in memory An example of this would be the absolute velocity this can be reconstructed from the nodal velocities hence does not require independent storage A similar list is also presented under the History Variables option Note that the selection of additional post processing variables will result in higher memory usage and file sizes If a significant numbe
87. ceded nade ddd cndacettanbaaleeedncnceanan 587 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information xi of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual AUTODYN User Manual Overview Overview ANSYS AUTODYN is an explicit analysis tool for modeling nonlinear dynamics of solids fluids gas and their interaction and forms part of the ANSYS Workbench suite Pull Down Menus Tool Bar Navigation Bar l Mtandi _ Components P Veia T Bardin r ida Detonation Dade redes ewe girs hae 4 a hel bairan 2 Cod T Mat dndn Meis T Geroni T Modafen See T Poihi Plots Panel CommandLine Message Panel View Panel ANSYS AUTODYN provides a user friendly graphical user interface GUI combining pre processor solver and post processor in the same windows environment A single executable performs simulations in both two and three dimensions The GUI is laid out with buttons running horizontally along the top and vertically down the left hand side of the main window The horizontal group of buttons is Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 1 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual referred to as the Tool Bar and the vertical group as the Navigation Bar The Tool Bar and Navigation Bar offer qu
88. current old coordinates of the selected node are displayed for your information New Coordinates Enter the new coordinates for the selected node in these fields Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 299 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Line varies J varies K varies All J indes K Inder Geometric ratio 1 000000 igs Arc C Line Are centre Xe 0 000000 Are centre Yc 0 000000 Are centre Zc 0 000000 ww This window lets you generate nodes along a line in index space from its two end points If either of its two end nodes has not been defined you are asked to input the coordinates of the node I J K varies Select the index direction of the line you want to generate The line will be generated across the IJK range in the selected direction All Select this option if you want to generate nodes for all 12 edges of the IJK range you have specified Geometric Ratios Input geometric ratios in the fields provided if you want to grade the zoning instead of generating equally spaced nodes Line Select this option if you want to generate the nodes along a straight line Arc 300 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published
89. dialog Select the erosion model you want to use from the pull down menu Geometric Strain bd None Geometric Strain Plastic Strain Then type in the parameter values in the fields provided Erosion Geometric Strair_ 2 Erosion Strain 1 500000 none Type of Geometric Strain Cutoffs This option lets you change the cutoffs for your material It is best to use the default values for these cutoff if you are using the default units mm mg ms Press next to this option to expand the dialog and change whatever cutoffs you want Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 193 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Cutotts Maranum Expansion Minimum Density Factor Minimum Density Factor SPH Maximum Density Factor SPH Minimum Soundspeed Maximum Soundspeed Maximum Temperature Material Reference Press next to this option to expand the dialog and type in a reference for your material in the field provided Material Reference This material data was obtained from YZ Corporation s progress report PGR 301 194 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials Copy ka Copy Material Selec
90. eile aie eli ieee ca 45 IC crctaetisapaetiicnetttateamineraithateniigte eta heeaattintars Manlius tana tate eetal a aten 47 Pull Down M NU Fil ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeess 47 Pull down Menu File NQW cccccccccccccccceccececceceeececeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 50 Manage Folders nnua i incl son E AR 53 Pull down Menu File Manage Folders cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 Manage Folders New Folder scccccccccssen cs ccpe cteiiey eects caeseei ec eat ceahaences eaves 54 Pulldown Menu File Save AS scssccscausee eet cee rates nets eee 55 PullDown Menus File SaveProject cccceeeeeeeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeees 56 Pull down Menu File Save AS Version ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 57 PullDownMenus File Export To Version ssccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeees 58 Pull down Menu File Export PostScript eecccccsccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 59 Pull down Menu File Export VRML eee cece eeeceeecceeeeeeeeeeesseeaeeeeeeeeees 66 MPOT e once cet tudea es antenmtetetuci adidas PRA AAEE AAEE D AN 68 Pull down Menu IIMPOrts2ioc5 cancer son evens dency tied seid 68 Pull down Menu Import TrueGrid c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 70 Pull down Menu Import ICEM sicecccsetcer tices clei ietuct tte ted ban euk sea teee zeae 74 Release 12 1
91. exist in all files Errors Warning and other Outputs Errors encountered during the mapping cause a generic error stop the current simulation A summary of the error is written to the message window The following table summarizes the error codes counter data counter No pressure data 30000 file Nope counter O Error in reading file 40000 file counter Errors and Warnings in the Field File writing routines will not stop the calculation but will write to the message window an appropriate message 516 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 2D Detonation 2D Detonation Deflagration POINT Detonation time 0 00E 00 POINT Detonation time 2 67E 03 Point Line Circle Manual Delete Review Path direct indirect Plot detonation points This window lets you set the locations where explosives will be detonated deflagrated Detonations Deflagrations The box at the top of the window shows you a list of the current detonations deflagrations you have defined You can select from this list Point Press this button to define a detonation point Line Press this button to define a line of detonation Circle Press this button to define a detonation circle planar symmetry Sphere Press this button to d
92. flag you accept that this is a Beta option and therefore may not be as stable or robust as expected in a general release version Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 29 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Slide Viewer The View Slides option on the Navigation Bar starts the Slide Viewer it can also be run independently of AUTODYN The Viewer lets you load and view GIF and GFA animations Components of the Viewer s user interface View Window Pull Down Menus Frame Slider View Bar Speed Slider Control Bar View Window This is where your animations are shown Pull down Menus 30 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual File ok Sequence Controls pen GIF Open GFA Exit This pull down menu lets you load single GIF and GFA animation files for playback and exit the program Sequence File Sequence Controls New Sequence File Open Sequence File This pull down menu lets you playback multiple GIF animations using sequence files A sequence file contains a list of GIF animations you want to view consecutively All the animations in a sequence file must be in the same directory as the sequenc
93. for new model Limit XYZ plot range Select this option to truncate plotting of unstructured and SPH parts Any unstructured elements or SPH nodes that fall outside the view range specified will be eliminated from the plot View Range Specify the maximum and minimum X Y and Z coordinates to be plotted for unstructured and SPH parts These limits are not set on a per part basis and so setting limits will truncate the plotting for all unstructured and SPH parts in the model Reset range for new model If this option is selected when a new model is opened the view range will be reset to show the full model If this option is not selected the view range you have selected will be maintained Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 109 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Settings Selecting Settings on the Navigation Bar displays the Plot Type Settings panel This panel lets you change settings for the various plot types that control how you view your model At the top of this panel a pull down menu lets you to select the plot type whose settings you wish to change Plot Type Settings Plot type Detonation 4 Velocity vector Gauge point You can change settings for the following plot types Display Grid Materials Contour Velocity Vector Gauge Point Boundary Jo
94. for your model You can select a Boundary Condition in this list New Press this button to define a new Boundary Condition Modify Press this button to modify the selected Boundary Condition Delete Press this button to delete one or more Boundary Conditions from your model Review Press this button to review the parameters for all Boundary Conditions in a browser window 208 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Boundaries New Modify Boundary Definition This window lets you define a new boundary condition Name Enter your name for the boundary condition in this field Type Select the type of boundary condition you want to use from this pull down menu Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 209 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 AUTODYN User Manual Velocity A Sub Option Select the sub option you want to use from this pull down menu Parameters Enter values for any parameters associated with your selection in the fields provided e g Constant Z Velocity 210 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates
95. hee Sin ai na i ee a ee pee see lan ala Ria A aha el 440 JOINS SION Gos estes cited iita conga ne Tea adores ca eta aaa a e aa iata a aeaii Sei 446 DOINS UINOIN a a ieee EA E E E A alae hotel ee tatet 448 Joins SAI ind edad corcededoabedeAenep lady aida deaieedede hed deeaededy bebedenioetadnde 449 Merg Joined NOG Shak AN NA toh A he A de 450 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information ix of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Bonded Face Connections cccccccecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeenees 451 Interaction S eit ated pac a estate ya oentes os EEE SEEE EEEE EEE EEE esed 454 Mteracion Seea ee a A ean ocr A teas E E Seance A 454 tagrange Lagranges mirens eae a Ae A A AT 455 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeentaaees 455 Lagrange Lagrange Introduction ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneaeeeeeeees 457 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Create cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 461 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Add cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 462 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange REMOVE cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 464 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Matrix cc ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 466 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange R
96. is allowed for an AUTODYN Part scaling as a fraction of the original Part mass Default is 0 05 equating to 5 of the original mass If this value is exceeded the simulation will terminate with an error message Two new element variables have been introduced with the development These variables are automatically activated when mass scaling is selected TIMESTEP The CFL timestep for the element MASS SCALE The mass scale factor applied to the element 1 0 indicates zero added mass 2 0 indicates 100 added mass etc 584 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual A typical procedure to invoke mass scaling would be as follows e Activate mass scaling retaining all the default parameters e Run the simulation for 1 cycle e Plot a contour of Timestep and review the element CFL timesteps Identify a suitable timestep for mass scaling The value chosen should exclude the majority of elements from mass scaling and especially those in regions critical to the simulation results e Re load cycle zero e Enter the selected Min CFL Timestep under Controls Timestep e Run the simulation T T 006 ms 006 ma 3g ms Minimum CFL timestep 2 0e Mass Scale CFL timestep Small number of elements are 5 1 0e 4 mass scaled to maximum gt factor of 5 0 Minimum CFL timestep
97. its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The Dialog panel generally contains input fields and buttons that access further input options Pressing a button in the dialog panel will display further dialog either within the dialog panel or in a new Dialog Window that is opened W Select Contour Variable Sel At the bottom of all Dialog Windows there are three buttons The button with a question mark provides help on the current windows function The two other buttons are Cancel and wv OK Pressing the Cancel button will close the window without applying any of the changes that you made within it The OK button closes the window and applies your changes In certain cases an Apply button will be present This provides the ability to apply any changes made within the window without closing the window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 9 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Material Data Input In the dialog panel or dialog windows input data that is required for a task to complete is marked L above When you enter an appropriate value the mark changes to below The OK button will remain inactive until you provide appropriate values for all required fields 10 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary
98. its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual E Command File Beta 9 T 7 Run vethout interupt eS If the Run on Load option is selected the commands in the selected file can automatically be run on loading the file or alternatively the user is given the option to interactively step through the commands Contirm 2 Continue with next ine AUTOOYN IDENT command fle ai ee If stepping through the command file the user is shown the next command before processing it If at any stage No is selected AUTODYN stops reading the file Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 19 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Message Panel The message panel shows a variety of messages during problem setup execution and viewing MB ANSYS ALITOOYN AUTOOYN Ple loot Setup Cuecuton Vew Options Help EERE BY CEELI ok Lo Beki ELE Plots 5 TA f ii F F bebe bobe bbe bebe be bede a a 3 r r r 5 e r PRESSURE r Y j r r r m a Jip i Mirror r r iu P e amp Cycle 0 Tene 0 000E 000 me Unde mm mg me Command Message Undock Command Line Line Window Message Window Command File Clicking the M box at the top right corner of the message panel will open a scrollable window showing all the messages displaye
99. its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual a ao oao aoao aoa ao aAa Aa oa OOO O DnoOoeoannenanaD DB DMD D Y YO N N N YH NY YB HY GO FO OO END AUTODY NSD 4 3 from Cantury Dynamics Material Location Void GAIR iced Cycle O Time 0 OOOE O00 ms Units mm mg ms Figure 2 2 2 Example Euler FCT grid using the Explicit Format Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 319 AUTODYN User Manual Fill Parts Fill Pressing the Fill button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog in the lower region of the panel Fill by Index Space Block Plane J Plane K Plane Fill by ndex Space Node Unused Fill Multiple Parts ER ee spe cree MultiFil Additional Fill Options Fill Multiple Parts Datafile Additional Fill Options Structured Unstructured This dialog lets you fill the selected Part with materials and initial conditions The only option available for unstructured parts is to fill the whole part When an unstructured parts only needs to be filled partially the Group option can be used to create a selected group of elements which then can be filled with materials or initial conditions Fill by Index Space Block Press this button to fill a block in index space
100. lets you set the following options for viewing boundary conditions Boundary Condition This pull down menu lets you choose the boundary condition you want to view Marker scale This slider lets you choose the size of the marker used to show where nodal boundary conditions have been applied Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 135 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Joins Plot Type Settings Plot type Joins X Marker scale a gt Plot pinned joints only Plot rigid joins only Plot all joins This panel lets you set the following options for viewing boundary conditions Marker scale This slider lets you choose the size of the marker used to show joined nodes Joins to plot These options let you choose the type of joins you wish to plot pinned rigid or all joins 136 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Axes Plot Type Settings Plot type Axes J Fix axes size Axis Dimensions Reset i Intervals lt Number of decimal places Label offset 1 000000 Axes are automatically chosen to fit the minimum maximum range of your model This dialog lets you de
101. model e g If your Ident is MylmpactProblem then the cycles zero Save file for the problem will be named MylmpactProblem_0 ad Heading This field lets you change the heading for your model Headings appear in plots and other output for your model Description This field lets you enter or change a detailed description of your model Units 86 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This field lets you change the units of length mass and time you want to use for your model The default units mm mg ms will give good results with small rounding errors for most models Changing the units here WILL NOT result in any scaling of data previously entered It only effects the units displayed in output and data conversions performed when reading writing data to from material libraries Current Cycle This field displays the current cycle number Current Time This field lets you change the current time Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 87 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Setup Symmetry AUTODYN started up in Workbench AD Modify symmetry Model symmetry 20 3D Model symmetry amp E Z
102. must be exactly divisible by this number Dezone Range In these six fields enter the range over which the dezone should be performed 374 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Jetting Kal Jetting Options Jetting options Jetting undefined Stop when jetting done tf fy p Kal Jetting Options Jetting options Jetting defined from J 1 to J 10 Stop when jetting done No C Yes Redefin Clear This window lets you set up jetting options for a 2D Shell Part These options let you perform shaped charge jetting analyses in which the liner is modeled as a shell Part and the jet characteristics are computed semi empirically The Jetting Tutorial describes these options in detail Jetting options The top of this window shows the shell nodes you have defined to be jetting nodes Stop when jetting is done Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 375 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select whether or not you want to stop the calculation once all the jetting nodes have jetted If you select no the calculation will continue until the wrapup cycle or time you have set is reached
103. plane perpendicular to the Z axis 238 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates of the lower corner of the plane in the fields provided Box Dimensions Enter the dimensions of the box DX DY DZ in the fields provided Cylinder E Part Wizard sh1 Select Predef Define Geometry Cylinder Whole C Half C Quarter R end origin Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000 Start Radius 0 000000 End Radius 0 000000 Length L 0 000000 This predef is a cylinder with its axis parallel to the Z axis Section Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 239 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 240 Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of the starting surface of your cylinder in the fields provided Start Radius End Radius You can specify different radii for the starting and end faces of your cylinder For a regular cylinder constant radius set the starting radius equal to the end radius Length Enter the length of your c
104. point in time The decomposition response algorithm is more impulsive in a given computational cycle than the penalty method This can give rise to large hourglass energies and energy errors The trajectory contact can handle multiple contact of a node with different faces of a contact surface during a computational timestep Current Limitations e The trajectory contact option cannot currently be used in parallel simulations Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 459 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual e The trajectory contact option cannot be used in combination with joined unstructured parts To circumvent this limitation the option to merge all joined unstructured nodes can be used e Interaction of SPH nodes accounting for their full natural thickness size is currently not available e The decomposition response algorithm cannot currently be used in combination with bonded contact regions The formulation will automatically switch to the Penalty method if bonded regions are present in the model 460 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Create E Create pap Select parts to be adjusted whist creatin
105. process the gap contact algorithm uses a timestep restriction such that during 1 computational time step a surface node cannot travel more than 20 into the contact detection zone Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 457 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual where 6 is the gap size and V the velocity of the penetrating node The gap contact is available for all structured as well as unstructured Lagrange Parts with exception for 2D unstructured Parts Trajectory contact The Trajectory contact algorithm is available for all 3D Unstructured solvers including SPH and has three main potential benefits over the Gap based contact algorithm e There is no requirement to specify a contact detection zone or leave a physical gap between Parts at the start of a simulation This makes model generation for complex 3D geometries significantly easier e There is no constraint on the timestep due to contact The algorithm detects node to fact contact by tracking the trajectory of the nodes and faces over time The removal of the timestep constraint on contact can give very significant performance improvements e The algorithm is energy conserving in addition to momentum conserving The trajectory of nodes and faces included in frictional or frictionless contact are tracked during the computational cycle If the traject
106. proprietary and confidential information 5 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual gt Run 6 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Dialog Panel and Dialog Windows When you select an option from the Navigation Bar dialog for that option appears in the Dialog panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 7 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual MB ANSYS AUTODYN Fie Import Setup Execution View Options Help Helate S is View Plots Select Pans Cycle 0 Weeds VOLUME 620 ML WBbody 6 VOLUME 625 ML WBbod VOLUME 632 ML Select plot type for selected part s Fill type IIl C Grid gt Pies Material Location aff pees Ilf C Material Status l F Contour pare i C None I Eroded nodes Contour variable Be PRESSURE B si l Beam sections 4 M Shall thickness Profile M Legend Mat direction M Marker M inplane x 0 M inplaney 0 M Scale M inplnez 0 Part Highlight 3 8 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and
107. r r r r r r E r r r r rc r r r r Howo Tene 0 000E 000 me Units mm mg me i Command Message Undock Command Line Line Window Message Window Command File Commands can be typed directly into the command line with multiple commands being concatenated by using a between the commands i e PARTS TARGET to select a part named TARGET Useful help information is output to the Message Output window Note however that the command language is more easily used when the command window is undocked from the main user interface The command line creates two command files 1 autodyn adc this is located in the directory C Documents and Settings username Local Settings Temp and is overwritten every time a new AUTODYN session is started ident adc this file is created every time a new model is created If the model is subsequently modified in a different AUTODYN session the new commands are appended to this file Therefore the ident adc should contain all commands that have been executed on the model since it was first created Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 13 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual A typical series of commands will look similar to that shown below PARTS target ZONING OPERATION TYPE Zoning ZONING Predef PREDEF GEOMETRY Box X O
108. remapping of all 336 state variables including the stress tensor etc The AUTODYN 3D remap data file import capability includes all state variables including the stress tensor etc In AUTODYN 38D an approximate remap into single material ALE and Lagrange solvers has also been included that is cells are filled with the material with the largest volume fraction If this happens to be void material then the element is set to unused When reading remap data files the origin of the remap can be user defined in both AUTODYN 2D and 3D Furthermore in AUTODYN 3D the axis of symmetry for the remap can be aligned with either the X I Y J or Z K direction This reduces the existing constraint that the X axis needed to be consistent between the 2D and 3D models whilst keeping the geometry calculation simple Note that all remap data files created in older versions of the software can still be read into the latest version AUTODYN although they will only contain hydrodynamic material data Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual e The results of the remapping of the Johnson Holmquist material model cannot be guaranteed to be accurate when the material is damaged considerably since voids are artificially closed during remapping The user should therefore take care to check r
109. removed from the Field file pressure i e Pappien Ergin P ameme Also the Field file set need to be selected by using the file browser to select the first in the required set 514 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Notes on the Mapping AUTODYN S3D interpolates linearly in time the pressure data from two Field files the current time of the simulation being in between the times of the fields When a field file is read into the solver a mapping is created This is a lookup table for each cell face in the Lagrange model that is activated pointing to a cell in the pressure field If a geometry data field is not present in the Field file then the existing mapping from the previous field is used The mapping is always created using the initial coordinates i e at time equal to zero of the Lagrange type parts The interpolation in space is the same as for the current FCT Lagrange interactions the nearest cells centre to the face centre is used Field file format ADF FILES The ADF AUTODYN FIELD file format contains field information on a regular structured rectangular grid Scalar data is cell centred The naming convention of the files is IDENT_ ADF FORMAT A A1 14 4 A4 Where is an increasing integer number starting at 0001 Record 1 FILEID CH 25
110. rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information Enter the material data for the brick and mortar materials of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 269 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Fill Part Shell ia Part Wizard sh1 Fill part v Fill part Fill with Initial Condition Set Initial Cond Projectile gt Material STEEL xl Shellthickness l x velocity 0 000000 Y velocity 0 000000 Z velocity 000000 R velocity 0 000000 This window lets you fill the shell part you are creating Fill Part Check this box if you want the Part Wizard to fill your Part The Part Wizard lets you fill your entire Part with a single material and initial values If you want to fill your part with multiple materials or initial conditions this can be done by pressing the Fill button after completing the Part Wizard Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box if you want to fill your Part using an Initial Condition Set 270 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use
111. rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Initial Conditions ia Set initial conditions of component Initial Cond Projectie a This window lets you assign initial conditions from an Initial Condition Set to all Parts of the selected Component Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box to fill the Component using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling Parts using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 409 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Apply Boundary Apply Boundary to Component fx Apply to Block Boundary Veloci constai hd a o This window lets you apply a boundary condition to a Component Boundary Select the boundary condition you want to apply from this pull down menu You can define Boundary Conditions by pressing the Boundaries button in the N
112. solver type to be assigned to imported parts Lagrange ALE Fill Blocks The TrueGrid zoning file contains one or more blocks of nodes imported as Parts These are displayed in the scrolling box at the top of the window If Import selected parts is checked you can select one or more blocks Import all Parts 70 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this option if you want to import all the blocks as Parts Import selected Parts Check this option if you want to import selected blocks as Parts Select the blocks you want to import in the top box Select solver type Select the solver type you want to assign to the imported Parts Press v4 to import the Parts Parts are imported with their block name You can change these block names later in the Parts panel True Grid zoning file format There are two formats of TrueGrid zoning files supported by AUTODYN implicit and explicit The two formats are illustrated below by an example which generates a single cell cubic part IMAX 2 JMAX 2 KMAX 2 called SUB1 with corners 0 0 0 0 0 0 and 1 0 1 0 1 0 and a four cell cuboid part IMAX 2 JMAX 2 KMAX 3 called SUB2 with corners 2 0 2 0 2 0 and 3 0 3 0 4 0 The implicit form of this data would be as follows IMPLICIT SUB
113. system is located in the Component Systems toolbox of the Workbench GUI This system allows you to start up the traditional ANSYS AUTODYN application and includes pre processing solve and post processing options for all AUTODYN solvers To start up the AUTODYN application simply insert an AUTODYN system into the project schematic Then double click the Setup cell 3 G Analysis i AUTODYN Model The AUTODYN application will start up and you can setup solve post process models in the familiar AUTODYN user interface The default start up mode will be the generation of anew model The start up mode can be changed by right mouse click the Setup cell after which you can select 36 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 New Model default Import Model open existing AUTODYN Save file Select user executable defines where a user customized version of AUTODYN resides Duplicate makes a copy of the model file Transfer Data From Model data from either the Mesh system or the Explicit Dynamics system are imported into AUTODYN ger New Model AUTODYN User Manual 1 AD AUTODYN Import Model Select user executable Duplicate Transfer Data From New Rename Properties After selection of the desired Setup cell setting double clicking the Setup c
114. the lower corner of the box in the fields provided Box Dimensions Enter the dimensions of the box DX DY DZ in the fields provided Grade zoning Check the boxes if you want to grade your zoning in any direction If you choose this option you can specify a range of cells which have a fixed size The remaining cells will be smoothly graded to fit the box dimensions Fixed size 282 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the dimension you want to use for the fixed size cells in this field Times Enter the number of fixed size cells you want to use in this field Position Specify where you want to place the fixed size cells relative to the full I J K range Centered at the center of the full I U K range Lower at the lower end of the I J K range Upper at the upper end of the I J K range e g ten fixed size cells centered e g twelve fixed size cells at the lower end e g eight fixed size cells at the upper end Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 283 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Cylinder Kal Create Predef Zoning Cylinder Whole Half C Quarter Solid Hollow origin 0 0000
115. the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided 520 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 2D Line ia Define detonations Define Line 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Range will Include Exclude BLAST WALL WK range From To l From J fi Tods This window lets you define a line of detonation X Y Coordinate Enter the X and Y coordinates for the two end points of the line Initiation Time Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented Range will Include Exclude region Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 521 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the excluded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range o
116. to be created or check Automatic numbering if you want AUTODYN to automatically assign numbers to slides Image type 94 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Use this pull down menu to select the image type you want to use to create your slides gif jpeg tiff or gfa Use OpenGL Check this box if you want to use OpenGL to create your slides This can significantly improve the plotting of SPH objects Fix Slide size Select this toggle to fix the size of slides created Specify the width and height of the image in pixels If the toggle is not selected the slides created are to be the size of the graphics window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 95 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu View Performance Profiler T Performance Profter Balance 18 xj Slave Loading This window provides a Performance Profiler that lets you visually monitor the load balancing performance of parallel simulations To take full advantage of this option you must create an empty file profile cfg in the directory where the AUTODYN model resides If you do this the following type of output will be displayed in the sc
117. to the Setup cell of the AUTODYN system Open the AUTODYN application by double click on the AUTODYN system Setup cell All relevant model information defined in Engineering Data Geometry Model and Setup components of an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system are transferred into the AUTODYN application Once in the AUTODYN application you can complete the model setup for example add Euler and SPH regions then solve in the AUTODYN application The link generated between the AUTODYN and ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system is persistent You can make changes to the model defined in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system update the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system Setup cell then update the AUTODYN system Setup cell The latest model definition will be transferred into the AUTODYN model while retaining additional features present only in the AUTODYN application This makes it very easy to make changes to model 40 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Notes e Changes made to the model in the AUTODYN application are NOT transferred back to the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system The link is one way e To avoid overwriting changes you make in the AUTODYN application we recommend that if a portion of the model is defined in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system for example and initial velocity the
118. volume On the right the two shell parts are not joined for thickening calculations and the shell overlap is not satisfactory for coupling Select Part 512 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This list shows all the shell parts that are coupled in Euler When a part is selected in this list all parts joined to it are displayed in the Included parts for normal calculation list Included parts for normal calculation This list shows all shell parts that are joined to the shell part selected in Select Part Select part s to add remove from normal calculation These two fields are used to add or remove parts from the normal calculation For example a model has shell parts hull 1 hull 2 and composite as shown in the image of the window at the top of the page To include the normals between the first two parts select hull 1 in the left hand list hull 2 in the right hand list and press the apply button Review If you select the review button an html summary is opened that displays which shell parts have been included in the Euler coupling the thickness and direction for these shell parts and also the thickened shell joined matrix that shows which shells are included in the normal calculation You can also view the thickened shells by switching on
119. want to fill in the fields provided Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box if you want to fill the block using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing sb next to the option in this window Material 322 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set select the material you want to use to fill your Part from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing sb next to the option in this window Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Velocity Radial Velocity Enter the radial velocity and choose between spherical or cylindrical symmetry For cylindrical symmetry the direction of the cylinder axis must also be specified Axial Velocity Enter the axial velocity and select the origin and direction of the axis
120. you want smoothed contour plots All elements have a single centered value for each variable If you do not smooth a contour plot each element will be color coded for the value the variable has in that element If you smooth a contour plot then the centered values are interpolated in space to provide smoothly varying values lsosurface Check this box to view a 3D isosurface plot of the contour variable You are prompted for the value to be used for the plot Min Max Value Check this box to open a window that displays the minimum and maximum values for the contoured variable Grey scales Check this box to view contour plots using grey scales instead of color Lines Check this box to view contour plots with colored lines instead of colored fills Number of contours This slider lets you select the number of contours you want to use for your plot Grid lines These options let you view grids with or without grid lines or with just the outline of the grids displayed and the color in which the gridlines or outline are displayed Contour scales Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 127 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Usually you should let the maximum and minimum values between which contours are plotted be set automatically using the data in the model However you may override these settings in the
121. 00 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 000000 Start Radius 000000 End Radius 0 000000 Length L 0 000000 Start Axial Increment 0 000000 Starting surface Flat C Convex Concave End surface Flat C Convex C Concave Mesh Type C Typel Type 2 This window lets you generate a cylinder with its axis parallel to the Z axis Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow cylinder If you choose a hollow cylinder you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the cylinder Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of the starting surface of your cylinder in the fields provided 284 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Start Radius End Radius You can specify different radii for the starting and end faces of your cylinder For a regular cylinder constant radius set the starting radius equal to the end radius Length Enter the length of your cylinder in this field Grade zoning along axis Check this box if you want to grade the zoning along the length of your cylinder you will asked to specify a geometric ratio to use Start Surface End surface The starting and end
122. 1 121212 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 SUB2 121213 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 2 0 2 0 4 0 2 0 3 0 3 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 2 0 Indicates implicit input is to follow Name of the part for which data follows The I J K range for the data l 1 2 J 1 2 K 1 2 x y z coordinates for node with index 1 1 1 x y z coordinates for node with index 1 1 2 x y z coordinates for node with index 1 2 1 x y z coordinates for node with index 1 2 2 x y z coordinates for node with index 2 1 1 x y z coordinates for node with index 2 1 2 x y z coordinates for node with index 2 2 1 x y z coordinates for node with index 2 2 2 Name of the part for which data follows The l J K range for the data l J 2 J 1 2 K 1 3 x y z coordinates for node with index x y z coordinates for node with index x y z coordinates for node with index x y z coordinates for node with index x y z coordinates for node with index x y z coordinates for node with index 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 a a AA Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 71 AUTODYN User Manual 3 0 2 0 3 0 x y Z Coordinates for node with index 2 1 2 3 0 2 0 4 0 x y Z coordinates for node with index 2 1 3 3 0 3 0 2 0 x y Z coo
123. 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Material Since you are only filling a plane no material fill is done only initial conditions for nodes are set i e velocities Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Velocity only Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 325 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Node Fill Part Eg Fill Node From ji From J From K Initial Cond Material velocity 0 000000 Y velocity 0 000000 Z velocity 0 000000 Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical See v This window lets you fill a J or K plane of the current Part with initial conditions The example shows is for filling a plane input for the other planes is similar Select the node to Fill Enter the I J and K indices for the node you want to fill Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box if you want to fill the node using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the
124. 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 433 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Velocity Set velocity of group al plamanis 11792 amana al Meera 111 355 Cees Radial Velocity oOo Symmety Spherical Angular Velocity This window lets you assign a velocity to the selected element Group Enter the velocity components in the fields provided and press a 434 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Initial Condition Set initial conditions of group all elements 11793 Elements subset 11793 Elements nodeset 4093 Nodes nodeset2 9560 Nodes VEIOCHY This window lets you assign initial conditions from an Initial Condition Set to the selected element Group Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box to fill the Group using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 435 of ANSYS Inc and its subsi
125. 2 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 265 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to fill your Part using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Material If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set select the material you want to use to fill your Part from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing se next to the option in this window Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Velocity 266 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Fill Part ka Part Wizard one Fill part v Fill part Initial Cond oH Ea Material c4 sw Densiy Int Energy x velo
126. 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select this option if you want to generate the nodes along the arc of a circle you will be asked to specify the center of the circle Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 301 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Surface ia Create Zoning constant J constant K constant All Generate surface from four edges J straight C K straight C Plane C Sphere Geometric Ratio 000000 This window lets you zone a surface of the IJK region you selected i e an index plane with I J or K constant from nodes already defined along its four edges I J K constant Select whether you want to zone a surface with a constant I J or K index All Select this option if you want to zone all six outer surfaces of the IJK range you have selected The dialog window will then look like this 302 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual x Surface constant J constant K constant All Generate all surfaces from edges C Plane Sphere Geometric Ratio 1 000000 J Geometric Ratio K Geometric Ratio 1 000000 X centre 0 000000 Y centre 0 000000 Z centre
127. 3D only Enter the number of cells in the K direction you want to combine into a single cell This total number of cells in the K direction KMAX 1 must be exactly divisible by this number 372 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solver Structured Dezone 2D amp 3D Lagrange ALE Dezone Part This window lets you dezone a 2D or 3D Lagrange or ALE Part Dezoning involves combining a number of cells in a fine grid into single cells of a courser grid MALE AO hee Lart Cent ves e es MALE ID AA hee Ln Dara Wes ie ae l factor Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 373 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the number of cells in the direction you want to combine into a single cell This total number of cells in the direction IMAX 1 must be exactly divisible by this number J factor Enter the number of cells in the J direction you want to combine into a single cell This total number of cells in the J direction SJMAX 1 must be exactly divisible by this number K factor Enter the number of cells in the K direction you want to combine into a single cell This total number of cells in the K direction KMAX 1
128. 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Solution 3D SPH ka SPH Solution Options Z Quadratic viscosity 1 000000 Linear viscosity 1 000000 Smoothing length Constant C Variable Interface treatment f None C mpact Separation Density Calculation Continuity Equation Kemel sum Work Unit Options Work Unit Size xSMLI 8 000000 Buffer Zone Size xSML 2 000000 This window lets you set solution options for 3D SPH Parts The default settings are the recommended settings Quadratic viscosity Enter the coefficient of quadratic viscosity you want to use for SPH computations Linear viscosity Enter the coefficient of linear viscosity you want to use for SPH computations Smoothing Length Specify whether you want to use a constant or variable smoothing length Using a variable smoothing length is not recommended for most calculations Interface treatment Specify if you want to use Impact Separation calculations for the treatment of interfaces between different SPH regions Density Calculation 370 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Specify whether you want to calculate densities using a continuity equation or kernal sum method Work Unit Options Work Unit Size Enter the work unit size as a multiple
129. 6 Character string which can be used to identify the file Record 2 NCYCLE TIME NTU NTU is the time unit 1 us NMU NLU 2 ms 3 s NMU is the mass unit 1 mg 2 9 3 kg NLU is the length unit 1 mm 2 cm 3 m Record 3 NI NJ NK Maximum number of nodes in each of the three directions Record 3 NS ITEM_NAME CH 256 Name of the item to follow i e 1 2 GEOMETRY or PRESSURE Record 4 NS The data attached to the Item specific See below 1 2 item Record LAST END OF SCALAR FILE The data attached to the items are GEOMETRY XC 1 NI X positions inline with the axis YC 1 Nd Y positions inline with the J axis ZC 1 NK Z positions inline with the K axis PN 1 NI 1 1 NJ 1 1 NK 1 Pressure of each cell varies fastest A geometry data record is only needed if the geometry has changed The presence of this field enforces a new mapping Therefore if the geometry is only present in Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 515 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual the first field then the mapping is only done at the beginning of the calculation On the other hand if the geometry is present in every file then a remapping is done every time a new flow file is read If a file does contain a geometry data record then AUTODYN expects that it will occur before the pressure record A pressure record must
130. ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Legend Plot Legend Settings This window lets you set the plot legends you want to display in the View panel Color triad Check this box to show a colored triad in the lower left corner of the View panel otherwise the triad is monochrome The axes are color coded as follows Red xX Green Y Blue Z Filename visible Check this box if you want the filename ident of you model to be visible in the bottom left corner of the View panel Heading visible Check this box if you want the heading of your model to be visible in the bottom right corner of the View panel User heading Check this box if you want to override the heading of you model with an alternative user heading Enter the user heading in the field provided Font size 120 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the size of the font used in the graphics window for the legend scale and user heading Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 121 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Node Element Numbers Node Element Plot Settings Plot type N
131. Any keyword not mentioned in the table above will be ignored 82 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull Down Menus Import Convert IJK to Unstructured Existing structured IJK Parts using the Lagrange Shell and Beam solvers can be converted into Unstructured Parts via the Import Convert IJK Part to Unstructured option The mesh material boundary conditions and initial conditions will be transferred to the new Part This feature lets you convert existing models to the new solvers to take advantage of the reduced memory requirements and increased speed of solution During the conversion you will be presented with the options Conversion options Merge connected IJK Parts nto single Unstracheed Part 2 Delete corweited WK regions v Merge joined IJK nodes into single Unstructured node Delete converted IJK regions This option deletes the structured IJK Parts that have been converted to unstructured solvers after the conversion process Merge connected IJK Parts into single Unstructured Part Complex geometries defined using the structured IJK solvers tend to be made up of a large number of relatively simple Parts that are joined together for example a mesh imported from ICEM CFD geo file By default the conversion process will merge connected IJK Parts i
132. Cut gi Paste cerama_001 0 aif Delete Slides on clipboard 1 Time delay s A I Loop GIF 640x530 Run Stop Forward Backward Load Animation Files Extract Gif Sequence File Load seq Save seq Create Movie Animation File Create GIF Create Al Create MPEG IV Compress AVI This panel lets you compose slide shows from images created using the Text Slide Camera single slide and Animation multiple slides buttons on the Tool Bar Directory The current directory where the slides are stored and processed is shown in this Box Press the Browse button below the box to change this directory Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 179 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual After changing the directory press the Refresh button to update the list of slides in the slide sequence box Search Pattern You can type a search pattern in this field that restricts the files you see in the slide sequence box In the example above the search pattern restricts files you see to those having an ident ben3d1 and extension gif all gif bmp tiff and jpeg files are shown if the search pattern does not include an extension Slide Sequence Box The left center box shows the current slide sequence Initially the slide sequence will contain all the files in the
133. Define Zoning 3D This window lets you Define the zoning for your 3D Part Box kad Part Wizard Projectile Define Zoning Cells in direction Cells in J direction Cells in K direction Nodes 2541 Elements 2000 Grade zoning in direction Grade zoning in J direction V Grade zoning in K direction Fixed size dz 1 0 000000 Tine Centred LowerK Upper kK Cells Enter the number of cells elements you want to use in the I J and K directions in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Grade zoning Check the boxes if you want to grade your zoning in any direction Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 251 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual If you choose this option you can specify a range of cells which have a fixed size The remaining cells will be smoothly graded to fit the overall dimension of the box you specified in the previous window Fixed size Enter the dimension you want to use for the fixed size cells in this field Times Enter the number of fixed size cells you want to use in this field Position Specify where you want to place the fixed size cells relative to the full I J K range Centered at the center of the full I J K range Lower at the lower end of the I J K
134. ECTILE This window lets you unjoin Parts This method of unjoining Parts works well no matter how many Parts you have in your model If you only have a few Parts you may prefer to use a Matrix to choose the Parts you join or unjoin Select Part s This box lists all the Parts in your model Select one or more Parts in this list Select Part s to unjoin to the above list This box also lists all the Parts in your model Select one or more Parts in this list Press 4 to unjoin all Parts selected in the top window with all Parts selected in the lower window 448 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Joins Matrix ia Join matrix PROJECTILE Remove PROJECTILE TARGET Remove TARGET Iv iv TARGET Remove TARGETS Iw iw iw iv tee Z This window lets you choose the Parts you want to join by checking boxes in a matrix If you have a large number of Parts you may find it easy to join unjoin Parts using the Join Unjoin options in the Joins dialog panel The matrix shown in this panel list the Parts of your model vertically and horizontally This matrix is symmetrical so only the diagonal and lower part of the matrix is shown Check a box to join the two associated Parts The Remove buttons let you quickly unch
135. However the accuracy of the element is reduced for warped elements Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 377 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual a Memory Time Speed I Mbytes Min up IJK Hex me ef te New Hex 340 0 88 1 97 Exact G 500 000 Elements 3 2Ghz Pentium IV Processor Windows XP Example performance comparison for the three Hex solvers now available in AUTODYN Hex Hourglass Control Hourglass control for the Unstructured Hex solvers is provided in two forms e AD standard e Flanagan Belytschko The AD Standard option is the default option and works well for most applications This is the most efficient option in terms of memory and speed A default viscous damping coefficient of 0 1 is recommended The Flanagan Belytschko form of hourglass control is available as an option since the AD standard form may not perform well under large rigid body rotations The Flanagan Belytschko form of hourglass control is invariant under rotation hence overcomes this problem Both viscous and stiffness based control is available The default is stiffness based control with a coefficient of 0 1 Tet Pressure Interaction The Unstructured Tet element is available in two forms 378 e Standard constant pressure SCP Tet e Average nodal pressure ANP Tet Burton 1996 The SCP tetrah
136. IK straight Select this option if you want to generate the interior volume so that nodes with the same I K indices lie equally spaced along a straight line Autozone Select this option if you want to generate the interior volume so that all nodes are spaced equipotentially Geometric Ratio 304 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter a geometric ratio in this field if you want to grade the zoning instead of equally spacing the nodes Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 305 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Translate ka Zoning Transformation Translate PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Laarange 17 41 7 TARGET2 Lagrange 5 10 3 TARGETS Lagrange 5 10 3 lt x distance DX 0 000000 Y distance DY 0 000000 Z distance DZ 0 000000 This window lets you translate nodes in XYZ space Current IJK Range Select this option to apply the translation to all nodes in the current IJK Range Selected Parts Select this option to apply the translation to all nodes of selected Parts A box lets you select one or more Parts X Y Z distance Input the X Y and Z components of
137. ILE IJK range From To From J Toss From k 1 e To K This window lets you define a detonation cylinder detonation propagates radially inward and outward from the surface of the cylinder Axis Select the axis X Y or Z to which the axis of symmetry of your cylinder will be parallel Radius Enter the radius of your cylinder in this field Center Coordinates Enter the two coordinates for the center of your cylinder in the fields provided Initiation Time 532 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented Range will Include Exclude region For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the excluded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range of application IJK range Enter the IJK range you want to use to limit the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided Release 12 1 2009
138. ILL O Fill cell with unused IFILL 1 Fill cell with air IFILL 2 Fill cell with air and target point An example of a blk file using the implicit format is shown below Note that the IFILL flag has to be defined for all elements in the part The resulting filled Euler FCT grid is shown in Figure 2 2 1 IMPLICIT 6 6 6 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 1000E 03 0 1000E 03 0 1000E 03 0 4400E 00 0 4400E 00 0 4400E 00 2 0680E 05 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 O 0 O 0 0 0 o0 0 0 0 0 0 o0 0 O 0 O 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 316 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual AUTODYN SD 4 3 from Cantury Dynamics Material Location Void es Cycle 0 Time 0O00E 200 ms Units mm mg ms Figure 2 2 1 Example Euler FCT grid using the Implicit Format Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 317 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Fill Block Explicit EXPLICIT Fill type IMAX JMAX KMAX Maximum I J K indices of input region XMIN YMIN ZMIN Minimum co ordinates of input region
139. N User Manual If you choose this option you can specify a range of cells which have a fixed size The remaining cells will be smoothly graded to fit the overall dimension of the box you specified in the previous window Fixed size Enter the dimension you want to use for the fixed size cells in this field Times Enter the number of fixed size cells you want to use in this field Position Specify where you want to place the fixed size cells relative to the full I J K range Centered at the center of the full I U K range Lower at the lower end of the I J K range Upper at the upper end of the I J K range e g ten fixed size cells centered e g twelve fixed size cells at the lower end e g eight fixed size cells at the upper end Cylinder 262 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ia Part Wizard sh1 Define Zoning Cells about circumference nC l Cells along length nL Cylinder Jma 11 Kmax 21 Nodes 231 Elements 200 Start Axial Increment fda 0 000000 2of3 Cells about circumference Enter the number of cells elements you want to use about the circumference of your cylinder in this field Cells along length Enter the number of cells elements you want to use along the length of your cylinder in this fie
140. N User Manual Total Force AUTODYN to always recalculate the density Method for Euler Strain rate calculation For multi material Euler there are two methods to compute strain rates Weighted For multi material Euler analysis involving materials with strength strain rates need to be calculated to compute the increment in strain from cycle to cycle The strain rates are derived from the velocity gradients which are obtained by an element surface integration of the velocity Using the Weighted option the face velocity that is used in the integration is a density weighted average of the element velocity on both sides of the face This is the default option and provides the most accurate strain rate calculation Averaged With this option the face velocity used in the integration is a simple average of the element velocity on both sides of the face and provides less accurate results than the Weighted option Until AUTODYN Version 6 1 the Averaged option was the only option available and can be used to reproduce old results Also models that are generated before Version 6 1 will still run using the Averaged method Method for Euler pressure calculation For multi material Euler cells containing two or more materials there are two methods for calculating the resultant cell pressure Equilibrium An iterative procedure is used for each material in a cell to establish a single pressure consistent with the equation of state and conditions of
141. NSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Motions Modify Ka Modify ALE settings x Spacing l ine ratio J line ratio K line ratio Frequency Cycle Frequency Iterations per cycle Relaxation coeff This window lets you change ALE settings Spacing Enter the geometric ratios for spacing of I J and K lines in the fields provided These are only used for certain motion constraints Frequency 388 Cycle Frequency Enter how often in cycles you want ALE rezoning to be performed Iterations per cycle Enter how many iterations you want the ALE solver to perform in converging to the spacing you have requested This is used for all motion constraints except Fixed Euler Relaxation coefficient Enter the relaxation coefficient you want to use for the ALE rezoning A value of 1 0 will move each node exactly to the location required for its motion constraint A value of 0 5 will move each node 50 of the distance towards the location required for its motion constraint Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Geometry Parts Geometry SPH When SPH parts are selected in the parts menu pressing the Geometry Zoning button displays the following panel in the lower region
142. Outer radius R 0 000000 KJ RSs This predef is a sphere Section Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 233 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Hex 234 Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half Quarter or Eighth This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow sphere If you choose a hollow sphere you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the sphere Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of the sphere in the fields provided Radius Enter the radius of the sphere in this field Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual g Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Cylinder Ogive Sphere Define Geometry Select node to edit gt Coordinate node 1 0 000000 Y Coordinate node 1 0 000000 Z Coordinate node 1 0 000000 1of3 Select Node to Edit Use the arrow buttons to select each of the 8 nodes in turn Coordinates Enter the X Y and Z coordinates of the node Frag Brick Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential inform
143. Plot Settings Marker location Marker location Specify marker position by Specify marker position by C X Zvah Node C Element Face C XvZvah Node Element Face Unstructured 11 Ss C UserNo Internal No Marker label The Marker Plot lets you highlight a particular position node or element of interest 152 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual AUTODYN 3D 6 0 BETA from Century Dynamics Material Location STEEL ALUMINUM TARGET Cell 2 J 11 K 6 Cycle 0 Time 0 000E 000 ps Units cm g us Specify Marker Position Choose to specify the marker position either by XYZ coordinates or by specifying a part and I J K values for a node or element XYZ coordinates Enter the coordinates of the marker location Node Element Face Lets you highlight a particular node element or face of an element Parts List Select the part containing the node element or face to be highlighted IJK Select the I J and K values for the node element or face of interest in case the part selected is structured Node Number Element Number Face Number Enter the node element for face number of interest in case the part selected is unstructured Depending on the selection of User No or Internal No the node element or face number displayed is the origin
144. Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Boundaries Delete kd Delete Boundary D EA Select boundary s to be deleted Zero X vel Zero Y vel Constant Z Constant P This window lets you delete Boundary Conditions from your model Select the Boundary Condition s you want to delete and press Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 211 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Parts In AUTODYN you build your model in Parts There are two concepts for node element and part data storage and processing available Structured Parts For structured parts in AUTODYN all information relating to the mesh and the elements in the mesh is stored and processed using the concept of J and K lines IJK space This means that for an element whose quantities are stored at position I J K the nodes belonging to that element are automatically defined in IJK space as l 1 J K I J 1 K l 1 J 1 K see the figure below I J Kel l 1 J 1 Kel I J 1 Kel Typical Connectivity for IJK based Element in AUTODYN K The element connectivity is therefore implicitly defined by the structure within the I J K indexing Information relating to each point in IJK space is also stored in this structure Furthermore in this structured approach the node and element storage
145. Read te ae eet ia aia Copied at iee da ohne iadaaa 389 Palts GeOmenyoSPH a a TA a EA E E AEEA EEE AEE 389 Parts Geometry New Modify ecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 391 Pdi SeGeOm ety Op Vice ke ee eh Ae hh Re nenene 394 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Geometry Import Part 0 ceeeeeeceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeenesaaaeeeeeeees 395 Parts Geometry Translate ccccccceeeeeceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 398 Parts Geometry Rotate gis Ah Ns cA i RA AA Ales 399 Components nesei aiena ai sete esate es anes Sau ud deed sedate hs va beads easate SU AA 400 CGC SINS yasi Sect iges Se iia cnt eai tat ated aetna Ged ceed ted Osa Ea ea 400 Components NOW athe cecetiand a E a DAAE EE a T aE E AES 402 Components Modify c eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenneeeeeeees 404 Components ECS es cae a rca aces Seen meee Se ree Me nnn 406 Components Malet rcs0cnscy arene carea tanta aia ia 407 Components Velocity oes ceccsecccnss rece cadcce setts cence vecenadcaie dud ele tendaietediniddtedeticne 408 Components Initial Conditions zc c ci cer eutccetteeteee terete hoot ee beck eur saat cea B eek oy 409 Components Apply Boundary s icc cesscst cesses ceteeet arene se
146. S IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 313 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual a Before refinement b After refinement 314 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Fill Block Parts Zoning Fill Block x Selected File Type Implicit Explicit This window lets you import complicated zoning and fill information such as a city centre consisting of many buildings of different size The option is only available for Euler FCT parts After browsing for an input file extension blk select the format of the external data Implicit format AUTODYN reads the fill flag of Euler FCT cells in a certain predefined sequence The fill flags of ALL the cells in the input region must therefore be defined in the data file Explicit format AUTODYN reads the cell index together with its fill flag Hence only the buildings unused cells and the cells with target points need to be included in the data file The external file imported into AUTODYN using the Fill Block option should have the extension blk for example block0 blk Note that this file name is not necessarily the same as the ident of the AUTODYN model that is being pre processed The Fill
147. SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 163 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Write Text Output Text History Output Output Options Wite UHS for cunent history plot Aite Output for all gauges m selected ident and variable Ident fidet O ben3di v YVa xvELOciTY vi Output Format Output data in HTML format C Output data in CSV Comma Separated Variable file This dialog lets you output the data from the current plot Write UHS for current history plot or output all the gauge data from a history file Write Output for all gauges and variables in selected ident Write UHS for current history plot Select this option to output to a CSV comma separated variable file which is suitable for importing into Microsoft Excel the data from the currently plotted history file Write Output for all gauges and variables in selected ident Selecting an ident and variable to output all the data for each gauge for the selected variable and ident is written to the output file Output Format Select the format for the data output either a CSV Comma separated variable file or an html file 164 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Multiple Variable Plot Hi
148. SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information V of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials Delete sj 28 5 2ct2 tec ct a cnestttecdlnrt tacttsutducsdcehbecceuudducacieedeanccehtmeaincesecnt de Materials WOOF ate as sede ee oeet es toetittcarthierousbeastocuchtnioeaid boxslbintoemtsisbeasthintoentaes alitte G2 qo i Uf 2 9 cease nae inne tah re eae eer ator eter otek ar ory Ren a orient stent e per ee Initial Conditions aieeeemepme ee nteae tree et isetrne oy ee niece eeeenrere nine lee Cee a Mica ae tc a eee ne oee nese Initial Conditions New Modify cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaees Initial Explicit Model IMitaliZation sicsscctotciccai ars see ctaccsecatelesaediacccasaibeesendiatioaceiess Initial Conditions Delete 0 0 eee eccccccccceccceseseeeeeceeceeeeseaeeeseeceeeeeeeseeaaaeeeeeeeees POUIMGAN OS yes sheik ce ste E CO At ee NN a E ee ee E BOUNGANOS atin tn cdc ee an alae E Alan Ray ols Boundaries New Modify 0 cccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceaeaeeeeeeeeeeeneas Boundaries Delete rannta a aa aa iaiia Parts New Select Predef 2D sicteictiintesctsictatcttinteieitectatetdagte ldutatctteeee ess Parts New Select Predef 3D ccceeeeeeeeeseseecceeeeeeeeeeestesseeeeeeeeeees Parts New Select Predef 8D Shell eeeeessseccceeeeeeeeeese
149. Select the material for each material layer Direction For orthotropic materials enter a material direction in degrees Thickness Enter the thickness for each material layer Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 331 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Composite Modify Define layer fill direction thickness Ed Number of Layers WA Layer Definition name vi tt e Layer Number Material Direction Thickness 1 stee gt ae __ 2 d00000 x 1 000000 This window lets you modify an existing layer definition Number of Layers Select the number of layers for the composite layer definition Layer definition name Enter a name for the layer definition Material Select the material for each material layer Direction For orthotropic materials enter a material direction in degrees Thickness Enter the thickness for each material layer 332 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Multi Fill Fill Part PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Lagrange 17 41 77 Subarid types to display Lagrange v a f Initial Cond a Material STEEL Density Int Energy x velocity Y velocity
150. Thickness cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 510 Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D JOINS cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 512 Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Weak Coupling ceeeeeeeeees 514 Detonation 2D tod et ek centimeter tte bk ao Se hid baa saa tak od 517 Detonation 2D iesin Peles eiaa EAA aana ENANA EAEan er IN ENEA Ei 517 Detonation 2D PONT oak eee eee a ae he a ee 519 Detonation 2D Line iota sacar Aaa etic Sa aon cA aes 521 Detonation 2D Circle ic ox cepa dees sys anced Sewieees ete oon echoed eaten ceniote 523 Detonation 2D Manblhicccctccctetct cies iara a a a Ea ENEE EE AEEA EAEE AEAEE 525 PY GTOMATON CCID IEPER 526 Detonation SDi aeaa a A R A A eantrne rete ree te eee eeeee 526 x Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Point acta sce tectcatednccdnut eantersdenniactdlanddcedicadt adic ndicedcebidutes 528 Detonation 3D Plane 2 0 eeeeesseeccceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 530 Detonation 3D Cylinder cccnaiecce Gee i haces eae Ae eA ANAS AA A date 532 Detonation SD Sphere wise aie vices cs eaa es a a aiae 534 Detonation 3D Manual eeceeececccceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 536 Parallel nanena aa T A A a T A A E O
151. UTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Detonation 3D Detonation Deflagration POINT Detonation time 0 00E 00 POINT Detonation time 2 50E 00 Paint Plane Cylinder Sphere Manual Delete Review Path direct indirect Plot detonation points This window lets you set the locations where explosives will be detonated deflagrated Detonations Deflagrations The box at the top of the window shows you a list of the current detonations deflagrations you have defined You can select from this list Point Press this button to define a detonation point Plane Press this button to define a detonation plane Cylinder Press this button to define a detonation cylinder Sphere Press this button to define a detonation sphere Manual Press this button to manually define initiation times for blocks of elements 526 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Delete Press this button to delete the selected detonation definition Review Press this button to review information for all detonation definitions Path Select whether you want detonation times to be calculated using direct or indirect paths Direct Path Detonation times are computed from straight line paths from detonation points This is the most accurate method but is only valid
152. UTODYN User Manual Self Interaction If the self interaction option is switched on the contact detection algorithm will also check for external nodes of a part contacting with faces of the same part in addition to other parts This is the most robust contact setting since all possible external contacts should be detected Interaction Timestep AUTODYN automatically calculates an Interaction Timestep based on the Gap size and the maximum velocity of the Parts involved in interactions Safety Factor Enter the safety factor you want to use to calculate the Interaction Timestep in this field You cannot enter a value greater than the default value 0 2 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 475 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange 2D Trajectory Contact Options Interactions Lagange Lagange Eulet Lagrange Type C Eremi Trajectory Method Penalty Shel thickness factor pooo Initial Penetrations Erosion n Retain inertia of eroded nodes User defined friction M Selinteraction Sls Ta Type Trajectory When a 2D model contains unstructured Lagrangian volume elements the 2D trajectory must be used to define Lagrange Lagrange Interactions An analysis model that contains a mix of structured IJK Lagrangian Parts and unstructured Lagrangian Parts
153. User Manual Pull down Menu File Export PostScript Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 59 AUTODYN User Manual Size EPS user i 160 00 This window lets you output the current plot to a PostScript file 60 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual PS file Enter the name of the PostScript file in this field use the Browse button to navigate to a directory file if you wish Dynamic Check this box if you want a new PostScript file to be output each time the input view is rendered Otherwise you must explicitly request a new file by pressing the Write PostScript button Write PostScript If Dynamic is not checked press this button to generation of a PostScript output file Color Mode This pull down menu lets you select the color format used in the output file Color Each color is specified as an RGB triple in the output file The output file can be rendered in color on a color printer or in greyscale on a monochrome printer Greyscale Each color is converted to a single intensity value The output file can only be rendered in greyscale on color or monochrome printer Greyscale files will be smaller tha
154. Variable Plot Set All Plots Set All Plots Select ident Select gauge s Select Y variable s Select X Variable XVELOCITY TIME x Number of selected plots 1 Lo This window lets you quickly add multiple plots to a multiple variable plot list Select ident This pull down menu lets you choose an ident from the models you have loaded Select gauge s This box lets you choose one or more gauges use the control and shift keys in the usual way to make your selection Select Y variable s This box lets you choose one or more variables for the Y axis use the control and shift keys in the usual way to make your selection Select X variable This pull down menu lets you choose a variable for the X axis Number of selected plots Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 167 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This tells you how many plots you have defined with your current selections The number of plots is the union of all selections in the four input regions 168 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Multiple Variable Plot Modify Selected Plot Modify Selected Plot Ident 0 ben3d1 v Line color Line style
155. Velocity Intemal Energy 10 000000 Sha Teles X velocity 0 000000 Y velociy 0 000000 Zvelocly Radial Velocity Angular Velocity This window lets you define a new Initial Condition Set Name Enter your name for the Initial Condition Set in this field Velocity Only Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 201 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select this option if you want your Initial Condition Set to only include velocities top left window Include Material Select this option if you want your Initial Condition Set to include velocities and a material and its associated variables top right window Material Use this pull down menu to select the material you want to assign to the Initial Condition Set Material variables Enter the appropriate values for the material density and internal energy to be used with this initial condition In addition if the initial condition is to be used with a shell element the element thickness can be specified Note that this must be used for the unstructured solvers Translational Velocity Specify the global x y and z velocity associated with the initial condition Radial Velocity This option lets you define an initial velocity of fixed magnitude The direction of the velocity will be defined by the radial position of each node from the or
156. YN User Manual In AUTODYN SD the results from the 2D multi material Euler analysis are remapped into the empty 3D Lagrangian part The Lagrangian cells that contain more than 50 material following the remap are set as used cells The profile of the Lagrangian jet will therefore not exactly match that of the 2D case although accuracy can be enhanced by using the greatest level of refinement that computation time constraints will allow Note that the constitutive state variables and velocities for the used cells are also remapped into the 3D analysis An example of the tip of a shaped charge jet following the remap procedure described above is shown below AUTODYN 3D 5 0 kom Century Dynamics TEMP K 3dlag Cycle 0 Time 0 000E 000 ms Units mm mg ms LAGRANGE TIP 5 G680 02 Lagrangian jet following remap into AUTODYN 3D The 3D Lagrangian part can then be translated or rotated and used in several analyses including normal and oblique impacts onto several different targets The following figures show an example in which a Lagrangian target has been introduced into the analysis and the penetration of the jet into the target has been simulated Note that erosion models were included for both the jet and target materials 338 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual
157. YS GY Harmonic Response ANSYS pick Dynamics ANSYS Fo arom fone a 2Asm a Modal ANSYS z GB Modal Sancet Oms F atic structural ANSYS BR Transient Structural ansys AUTODYN 7 Resuts Explicit Dynamics ANSYS lt Drag a Toolbox tem on top of a system to reuse components and exchange dats Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 35 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual One way to work in ANSYS Workbench is to drag an item such as a component or analysis system from the Toolbox to the Project Schematic or to double click on an item to initiate the default action You can also use the context menus accessible from a right mouse click for additional options You will view your analysis systems the components that make up your analysis in the Project Schematic including all connections and links between the systems The individual applications in which you work will display separately from the ANSYS Workbench GUI but the results of the actions you take in the applications may be reflected in the Project Schematic Full details of how to use ANSYS Workbench are provided in Workbench Help section of the Workbench on line help system An ANSYS AUTODYN product license should enable three primary systems in the Toolbox of the Workbench GUI AUTODYN System The AUTODYN
158. YS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented Range will Include Exclude region For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the excluded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range of application IJK range Enter the IJK range you want to use to limit the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 529 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Plane ia Define detonations Define Plane Plane fox y 2 x 0 000000 Initiation Time 0 000000 V Limit range of application Range will Include Exclude PROJECTILE IJK range From To l From J Tods From kzi e To K This window lets you define a detonation plane Plane Select whether you want to define an X Y or Z detonation plane X Y Z Coordinate En
159. able in the current version but not in the version selected will be lost we recommend that you always choose a new filename when using this option Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 57 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual PullDownMenus File Export To Version MB ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN am Import Setup Execution View Options H E Save Project Seniesa Version 5 0 01c Version 0 02b Version 6 0 01 e Save settings Load settings Version 11 0 00a Print Export PostScript Export VRML Export Formatted Import Formatted c plot type for selected pai Close AUTODYN ie Fill type Add er Materials Gid 5j Vector This option lets you Save an AUTODYN save file in the format supported by previous versions The formats available are listed and the chosen format should be selected from the list Save Model In Version 11 0 00a Format td Browse Folder List AUTODYN Save cycle 0 As features and options available in the current version but not in the version selected will be lost we recommend that you always choose a new filename when using this option 58 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN
160. affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to apply a boundary condition to a node or face Group Clear Press this button to remove a boundary condition from a node or face Group Fill Element Group Fill Element Group Material Velocity iri Condon Material Press this button to fill the selected element Group with a material Velocity Press this button to assign a velocity to the selected element Group Initial Conditions Press this button to assign initial conditions to the selected element Groups Transform group zoning Transtorm Group Zoning Translate Rotate Scale Translate Press this button to rotate the current group Rotate Press this button to rotate the current group Scale Press this button to scale the current group Group Operations Group Operations Delete Elements Split Nodes Merge Nodes Reverse Shell Normals Four operations are available for element groups Delete Elements 422 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Use this option to delete all elements within a selected Group Select the Group containing the elements to delete and select OK The elements will be deleted from the model Define Element Group Delete Elements in Group Example use of Delete Elements Gr
161. ains proprietary and confidential information 431 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Clear Clear Boundary Condition from Group all elements 11793 Elements subset 11793 Elements nodeset 4093 Nodes nodeset2 9560 Nodes This window lets you clear a boundary condition to a Group The type of Group and type of boundary condition must be consistent i e you can only clear a nodal boundary condition from a node Group and a face boundary condition from a face Group Group List Select the Group you wish to clear from the boundary condition to Boundary Select the boundary condition to be cleared from the Group 432 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Material Select material to fill group al elements 11793 Elements subset 11793 Elements nodeset 4093 Nodes This window lets you fill the selected element Group with a material Material Select the material you want to use to fill your Group from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by press the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Material Parameters Enter material parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Release
162. al Parts Boundary Apply Interactively Interactively Apply Boundary Condition fx This window lets you apply a boundary condition interactively by creating a 2D polygon in the graphics display The boundary condition is applied to any nodes or faces that lie within the 2D polygon Boundary Select the boundary condition you want to apply from this pull down menu You can define Boundary Conditions by pressing the Boundaries button in the navigation bar or you can press next to the pull down menu Close the window with the button to enter the polygon definition stage Select the polygon points using the Alt key together with the left mouse button To delete the last polygon use the Shift button together with the left mouse button To complete the polygon use the Control and left mouse button After completing the polygon the selected nodes or faces are displayed Press the button to accept this selection and apply the boundary condition At any stage the X button may be used to cancel the process 352 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Boundary Clear Interactively Interactively Clear Boundary Condition fx This window lets you clear a boundary condition interactively by creating a 2D polygon in the graphics display The boundary condi
163. al User Number or the AUTODYN internal number Text labels Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 153 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box to label each marker Text size This defines the text size used for the label Label bounds Check this box to put a bounding box around each label Label offset Check this box to set your own offset position for labels Leading line Check this box if you want to show lines joining each marker to its label Radial offset Check this box if you want to use radial label offsets instead of linear offsets X Y Z offset These sliders let you adjust the label offset distance in the X Y and Z directions 154 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Shell Normal Shell Normal Settings This window lets you change settings for plotting shell normals Local Axes length scale Use this slide to vary the length of the arrows displaying the shell direction Fix length scale Check this box to fix the shell normals length scale Include Joins Select this toggle to show an average normal for joined nodes If this toggle is unselected a normal will be shown for each of the nodes joi
164. al displacements and element stresses strains plastic strains and velocities from an ANSYS solution are used to initialize an AUTODYN analysis at cycle 0 The AUTODYN solution is therefore completely initialized at the start of the analysis e This option is only applicable to unstructured solid elements hexahedra and tetrahedral e This option is applicable to results from a linear static structural non linear static structural or transient dynamic Mechanical system e The following materials can be used in the AUTODYN solution with the Material State Option Equations of State linear hyperelastic Strength Models elastic von Mises Johnson Cook piecewise Zerilli Armstrong Steinberg Guinan Cowper Symonds hyperelastic bilinear isotropic hardening e Note that static damping can also be applied by using a static damping constant but this may not be required Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 205 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual E soliton autoon 4s E Resuts Splict Dynamics Results Time The result time from the ANSYS Mechanical implicit analysis at which to extract results from the rst file For a linear static solution this will always be 1 0 Fora nonlinear or transient dynamic solution this time will correspond to a result time from the ANSYS Mechanical analysis
165. an decompose each grid based Part in you model into smaller blocks called sub domains that can be assigned to different tasks on different hosts for processing For each Part these blocks are formed by defining planes in the J and K direction where cuts are made to form the sub domains Parts List The top box lists the model Parts that you can decompose for parallel processing You can select a Part in this list Number of Sections Enter the number of sections into which you want the selected part divided in J and K directions Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 543 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Dividing Planes Enter the I J and K values for the dividing planes in the three index directions the default values place the dividing planes evenly through the grid The example above would decompose the PROJECTILE Part into 24 sub domains 544 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Task Assignment ia Task Assignment Assign Subdomains to Tasks Automatic Manual PROJECTILE l sec 3 J sec 2 K sec 4 TARGET l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGET l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGETS l sec 2 J
166. and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Boundary Parts Boundary Pressing the Boundary button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog in the lower region of the panel Apply Boundary by Index Apply Boundary by Index Block Plane J Plane K Plane Node Clear Block My Apply Boundary Interactively NOOE Clear o w aii Apply Boundary Interactively Select options above to interactively apply or clear boundary conditions Apply Clear Select options above to interactively apply or clear boundary conditions Structured Unstructured This dialog lets you apply boundary conditions to the selected Part Block Press this button to apply a boundary condition to a block in index space I J K Plane Press this button to apply a boundary condition to a plane in index space Node Press this button to apply a boundary condition to a node Clear Press this button to clear previously applied boundary conditions Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 347 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Boundary Block ia Apply Boundary to Part Apply to Block IJK range for boundary From pals From J To J From K To K Boundary ZeroXvel vi This window lets you apply a boundary condition to a bl
167. and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 11 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Command Line Panel The command language will provide the user with the capability to e Record operations made in the GUI e Modify Playback repeat operations e Load operations previously saved to file e Setup models using the command language This feature has Beta status and must be activated by the user by adding the following lines above the Additional User Title option in the autodyn ini file command_line_on 1 By activating this flag you accept that this is a Beta option and therefore may not be as stable or robust as expected in a general release version The command line is initially inactive until a model is either loaded or created To the right of the message line there are 2 buttons in addition to the Message window button that are related to the command line 12 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pe Impat Setup Diodon Vew Options Melb EENS CH GE RARS PE CERA GEES ELT View Plots pei EER
168. and confidential information 27 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This switch sets graded background on or off If this switch is on a graded background color is used If this switch is off a solid black or white color is used depending on Background color setting 0 Graded background off 1 Graded background on OpenGL for Slide creation This switch sets OpenGL for Slide creation on or off Using OpenGL during the creation of slides can cause problems for some graphics cards If you experience any problems creating slides with this switch turned on try turning it off 0 OpenGL off for slide creation 1 OpenGL on for slide creation Browser Options By default when AUTODYN opens an html document either for the on line help or for the summary reviews the page will be displayed in any browser that is currently open By setting this flag to 1 a browser will be opened to display the information This option may not work for all browsers Warning Sound Options This option lets you enable or disable the warning beep Mouse and Keyboard options These options let you set the mouse and keyboard combinations for interaction Each action type has a keyboard and an associated mouse option A default will be used if any are not defined Mouse Not used Left Mouse Button Middle Mouse Button Right Mouse Button ono eyboard None Shift Control Alt ono Mouse Option Ro
169. ange ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 468 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange FrictiOn cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 469 Lagrange Lagrange 2D Gap Contact Options cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 472 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange 2D Trajectory Contact Options 476 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange 3D Gap Contact Options ee 480 Interactions Lagrange Lagrange 3D Trajectory Contact Options 487 E lerLagrange 2 DB essa Gas steccderevesdtesuenede aa aa Eaa TAE Ge wees 494 Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D 0 ceeceeseecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenneeees 494 Interactions Euler Lagrange Introduction ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 499 Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D New Polygon ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 502 Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D VelOCity ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 503 Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D Porosity cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 504 Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D New Interaction eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 505 Euler Lagrange 3D cic be stents ctl ites ba csted Seite Dials ddl cactitd db tencepieeaies 506 Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaees 506 Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Select ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 508 Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D
170. ansferred or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions of that software license agreement ANSYS Inc is certified to ISO 9001 2008 U S Government Rights For U S Government users except as specifically granted by the ANSYS Inc software license agreement the use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS Inc software license agreement and FAR 12 212 for non DOD licenses Third Party Software See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software and third party software If you are unable to access the Legal Notice please contact ANSYS Inc Published in the U S A ii Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Table of Contents of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTOR YN User Manual ici eeen nena died heii dunietei di a K R i KR 1 LG cla las prpecenene e aa a er ester ee ter Ttrner et E Tres E rer neret ner 1 1210 1 1 Reaper be ee Nr wr ONT Ur UP UDO UT UT CUNT UT CDE UT Ur STEn UT Or ent Ur Ur enSnNNT Croan eT SreT Ur er ener ener ertT Sreren tT ery 1 OVERVIEW TOON i fE E cove cue cure cuby cove cues E E A E E tears cuveceeecer teeters 3 Overview Navigation Bar esses acted oct
171. application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the excluded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range of application lJ range Enter the IJ range you want to use to limit the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided 524 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Detonation 2D Manual ia Define detonations Ignition Times IJK range From To l From J 1 ToJ Initiation Time 0 000000 Plot contours of variable alpha to view detonation times shown as negative AUTODYN User Manual This window lets you manually define initiation times for blocks of elements Part List The top box lists all the Parts in your model Select the Part you want to define initiation time for in this list lJ range Specify the IJ range for a the block of elements to which you want to apply an initiation time Initiation time Enter the initiation time that will be applied to all elements in the block in this field Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 525 A
172. ation 181 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ha je listed in the sequence do not exactly match those in the current directory results may be unpredictable Create GIF Press this button to create a GIF animation from the current slide sequence Create AVI Press this button to create an AVI animation from the current slide sequence Create MPEG Press this button to create an MPEG animation from the current slide sequence Compress AVI Check this toggle to choose compression for AVI Choose Compression xi Compressor Microsoft Video 1 ing Cancel Compression Quality 75 af al Configure About IV Key Frame Every 15 frames IV Data Rate 200 KB sec In the choose compression dialog select the type of compression to use for the movie The size and quality of the resulting AVI animation will depend on the choices made in this panel 182 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual View Slides Slide Viewer The View Slides option on the Navigation Bar starts the Slide Viewer it can also be run independently of AUTODYN The Viewer lets you load and view GIF and GFA animations Components of the Viewer s user interface View Window Pull Down Menus Frame Slider View Ba
173. ation 235 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ki Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Cylinder Ogive Sphere Hex Define Geometry Number of fragments bricks in x dir horizontal Number of fragments bricks in y dir vertical Number of fragments bricks in 2 dir minor Length of each fragmentbrick in x dir Lenath of each fragment brick in y dir Length of each fragment brick in 2 dir Mortar size between each frag brick in x dir Mortar size between each frag brick in y dir Mortar size between each frag brick in 2 dir Mortar included in above frag brick dimensions Offset ratio between adjacent layers in x dir V Fragment brick symmetric about x 0 236 The fragment brick wall is built with its axes parallel to the X Y and Z axes The X direction runs the length of the wall The Y direction runs the height of the wall The Z direction runs through the thickness of the wall Number of fragments bricks Use these fields to set the number of fragments bricks in the X Y and Z directions Length of each fragment brick Use these fields to set the length of a single brick fragment in the X Y and Z directions Mortar size between each fragment brick Use these fields to set the mortar size or gap between fragments bricks Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential i
174. ations Input the magnification you want to use 1 0 gives no magnification Surface rendering of large 3D models 3D models using hexahedral elements e g Lagrange or Euler are usually rendered using all the elements Check this box to render models using only external faces This makes the process much quicker This option cannot be used for all plots e g plots with opacity applied Standard shell layer to plot This option lets you set the layer that is plotted for standard shells e g in contour plots material status plots etc Composite shell layer to plot This option lets you set the layer that is plotted for composite shells e g in contour plots material status plots etc 112 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Background This option lets you set the background color for the view panel Graded Shading This option lets you control the color including color grading for the background of the View panel You may select a color to be used for each of the four corners of the display by pressing the buttons E p The selected Default colors shown here will produce the following background AUTODYN from Century Dynamics fee loj xj Fie Import Setup Execution Vew Options Hep Oofelalalslale sie klela lo ale Ee a Hl Plot Typ
175. atrix Range Friction Review Self interaction Tol 0 200000 Interaction by Group Self Interaction If the self interaction option is switched on the contact detection algorithm will also check for external nodes of a part contacting with faces of the same part in addition to other parts This is the most robust contact setting since all possible external contacts should be detected Self interaction Tol The self interaction option enables automatic erosion when an element deforms such that one of its nodes comes within a specified distance of one of its faces This option will prevent that volume elements become degenerated 478 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The specified distance is calculated using the Self interaction Tol value which is a factor in the range 0 1 to 05 This factor is multiplied by the smallest characteristic dimension of the elements in the mesh to give a physical dimension Element will be erode Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 479 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange 3D Gap Contact Options Interactions Lagange lagarge Eulet Lagrange Type Exte
176. avigation bar or you can press next to the pull down menu 410 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Clear Boundary Apply Boundary to Component fx Clear Boundary Boundary Velociy constai hd o This window lets you clear a Boundary Condition from the current Component This operation does not delete the definition of the Boundary Condition so you can re apply it later Select the boundary condition you want to clear from the pull down menu and press Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 411 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Translate ka Component Translation x x distance DX 0 000000 Y distance DY 0 000000 Dx Z distance DZ 2500000 Translate This window lets you translate all Parts of the selected Component in XYZ space X Y Z distance Input the X Y and Z components of the translation in these fields 412 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Rotate ia Component Rotation a R
177. blished 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Kd Part Wizard Projectile Define Zoning Cells across radius nA Imax 2 Jmax 2 Nodes 4 Elements 1 np 0 000000 Times eh 2of3 Cells across radius Enter the number of cells elements you want to use across the radius of your wedge in this field Number of elements Displayed below the first input field is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Grade zoning Check this box if you want to grade your zoning If you choose this option you can specify a range of cells which have a fixed size The remaining cells will be smoothly graded to fit the overall dimension of the box you specified in the previous window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 247 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Increment Enter the dimension you want to use for the fixed size cells in this field Times Enter the number of fixed size cells you want to use in this field Rhombus 248 la Se Pees Poe 4 mane BE LLY F au Tae T Cells across quarter Enter the number of cells elements you want to generate across a quarter of the rhombus Number of elements Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information o
178. c All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 343 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual a unrefined b refined by factor of 4x4x4 Central section of part Range l 21 31 J 11 21 K 1 21 The analysis of the detonation of the spherical charge is initially performed using a 1D wedge analysis which is then remapped into the refined grid as shown below The expansion of the blast wave in the central region of the city is then performed using the refined 3D Euler FCT grid until the wave front reaches the boundaries of the refined region as shown in figure b At this point the results for this analysis are written to a block remap data file named BLKRP1 a initial blast remap from 1D wedge data b blast wave reaches boundary of refined region Expansion of blast in refined central region Following the creation of the remap data file BLKRP1 the original model is subsequently reloaded and a larger region of the Euler FCT part is analyzed as shown below in figure a This section is refined by a factor of 2 in all directions to give the resulting mesh shown in figure b 344 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual a unrefined b refined by factor of 2x2x2 Larger central section
179. can currently not be run with Trajectory contact and also not with Gap contact 476 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual To be able to use Trajectory contact the analysis model must contain unstructured Lagrangian volume Parts only Similar to be able to use Gap contact the analysis model must contain structured Lagrangian Parts only Method Method in which a contacting node is pushed back to the true contact position during the computational cycle There are two methods available 1 None No contact defined 2 Penalty If a contact event is detected a local penalty force is calculated to push the node back to the face Equal and opposite forces are calculated on the nodes of the face in order to conserve linear and angular momentum The applied penalty force will push the node back towards the true contact position during the cycle However it will take several cycles to satisfy the contact condition Kinetic energy is not necessarily conserved The conservation of energy can be tracked using the energy time history 3 Decomposition Response DCR All contacts that take place at the same point in time are first detected The response of the system to these contact events is then calculated to conserve momentum and energy During this process forces are calculated t
180. can currently run with all join and contact options with the exception of edge on edge contact This later option is likely to be available in the near future 556 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Define Output lInterrupt Refresh Save C Cycles Times Start time 0 050000 End time 11 000000e 006 Increment 0 050000 Select Variables Review Variables Results File History Capture image Print Log file on Call EXEDIT Field output This window lets you set the type of output you want from your calculation Interrupt Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 557 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interrupt Cycles Times Start cycle End cycle v Increment Set the frequency at which your calculation is interrupted stopped for you to plot review and examine Refresh Refresh Display heq Tent hea Set the frequency at which your plot in the view panel is refreshed Save Save Cycles Times state POO End cycle 1100000 reremen v Select Variables Review Variables The most important type of output you will want is data written to Sa
181. city Y velocity Z velocity Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical hd Angular Velocity Angular velocity 0 000000 origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000 Direction 000000 Direction Y 0 000000 Direction 2 0 000000 This window lets you fill the part you are creating Fill Part Check this box if you want the Part Wizard to fill your Part The Part Wizard lets you fill your entire Part with a single material and initial values If you want to fill your part with multiple materials or initial conditions this can be done by pressing the Fill button after completing the Part Wizard Fill with Initial Condition Set Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 267 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to fill your Part using an Initial Condition Set The advantage of filling a Part using an Initial Condition Set is that if you later change one or more parameters in the set you do not have to refill your Part Use the pull down menu to select the Initial Condition Set you want to use You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window Material If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set select the material
182. color values can be gray red green or blue The value must be in the range 1 to 8 The default value is 2 Alpha Threshold Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 65 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu File Export VRML VAML File trp express wl Browse Protocol VRML1 C YRML 2 Float Precision Color Precision Iv Indent format E Suppress Normals E Dynamic Write YVAML This window lets you output the current plot to a VRML file VRML file Enter the name of the VRML file in this field use the Browse button to navigate to a directory file if you wish Protocol Select the VRML protocol you want to use to write the output file VRML1 A clear text ASCII encoding of the VRML 1 0c standard 29 January 1996 VRML2 66 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual A clear text UTF8 encoding of the VRML 2 0 standard ISO IEC CD 14772 4 August 1996 Float Precision Use this field to specify the floating point precision when real values are written to the output file The values include spatial coordinates normal vectors texture coordinates material coefficients and transformations but not
183. colors The value must be in the range 1 to 8 The default value is 4 Color Precision Use this field to specify the floating point precision when real values are written to the output file The values include diffuse material colors emissive material colors and light colors The value must be in the range 1 to 8 The default value is 2 Indent format Check this box if you want the file to be written with indented nesting of VRML nodes Indentation improves legibility but increases the size of the output file Suppress Normals Check this box if you do not want normals to be written to the VRML Dynamic Check this box if you want a new VRML file to be output each time the input view is rendered Otherwise you must explicitly request a new file by pressing the Write VRML button Write VRML When the dynamic switch is FALSE this one shot parameter triggers the generation of a VRML output file When the dynamic switch is TRUE the user interface for this parameter is removed Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 67 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Import Pull down Menu Import MB ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN File PUIS Setup Execution View Options Hel E from TrueGrid zon a ES from ICEM CFD ge0 seul ibs from LS DYNA k from MSC Nastran BOF dat Convert IDK Parts
184. corresponding to the node at J K 1 DX DY DZ X Y Z zone dimensions for input region XRAT YRAT ZRAT Ratios used to extend grid beyond the original input region For example if XMAX is the maximum X coordinate of the input region and XRAT 0 5 the generated grid would be extended to XMAX 0 5 XMAX XMIN in the X direction with geometric zoning being used automatically for cells above XMAX The maximum index of the part will be larger than the IMAX defined in the data file hence extra elements are created to include the extended air space SIE Unit dependent specific internal energy for the air 2 068x10 is usually OK for the mm mg ms units I J K IFILL J and K index of the cell and its fill flag One cell per line of input IFILL O Fill cell with unused IFILL 1 Fill cell with air default IFILL 2 Fill cell with air and target point An example of a blk file using the explicit format is shown below Note that only elements with an IFILL flag of O or 2 need to be defined The default of 1 is assumed for all other cells The resulting filled Euler FCT grid is shown in Figure 2 2 2 EXPLICIT 11 11 11 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 0 1000E 03 0 1000E 03 0 1000E 03 0 5000E 00 0 5000E 00 0 5000E 00 2 0680E 05 6 6 2 0 6 6 3 0 6 6 4 0 6 6 5 0 6 6 6 0 6 6 7 0 6 6 8 0 318 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and
185. ct schematic right click the Setup cell of the AUTODYN system and left click Select user executable after which you will be asked for the user executable name and locaton Transfer Data From New Update Rename 44 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Pull down Menus Pull down Menus AUTODYN User Manual Pull down menus let you access all the features and dialog panels windows in AUTODYN Most options can also be accessed through buttons on the Tool Bar and Navigation Bar Options that are only accessible through pull down menus are shown below in red Options that only are available when AUTODYN is started outside the Workbench environment are shown below in green Import from TrueGrid zon Open from ICEMCFD Open geo Results File from LS DYNA k from MSC NASTRAN bdr dat Save Save Project Convert IJK to unstructured Save As Save As Version Export to Version Manage Folders Save settings Load settings Print Export PostScript Export VRML Save Formatted Export Formatted Open Formatted Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information Execution Setup Description Run Interactively Symmetry Batch Material Runner Initial Co
186. cts Transformations Translate Press this button to translate the currently selected objects Rotate Press this button to rotate the currently selected objects 390 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Geometry New Modify There are three types of Geometry Predef objects you can use Box Cylinder and Sphere These are described below Box Create SPH Geometry i x oware 1 Box Cylinder Sphere gt origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 000000 Dx 000000 DY 0 000000 DZ 0 000000 Principal Direction 11 11x 0 000000 Wis 0 000000 Ws 0 000000 Rot About 11 0 000000 Define the box by entering the XYZ coordinates of the origin and the size in each of its three directions The orientation of the box is defined by a principal direction vector and a rotation about this vector When the box is defined a wire frame representation is shown on the screen together with an arrow displaying the principal vector direction Cylinder Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 391 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Create SPH Geometry x osietneme C Box Cylinder Sphere Whole Half C Quar
187. current Directory that satisfy the Search Pattern listed in alphanumeric order You can use the Cut Paste and Shuffle Up Down buttons to remove or rearrange files in the slide sequence Press the Refresh button if you want to abandon your current sequence and start over with all files in alphanumeric order When you select a file in the slide sequence the image of that file is automatically displayed in the View panel Shuffle Up Down These buttons let you move one or more files up or down in the slide sequence Select the group of files you want to move using the shift key to select more than one file and press the Shuffle Up or Shuffle Down button to move them collectively one position up or down respectively Cut Select one or more files in the slide sequence and press this button to remove them The removed files are placed on the clipboard and you can use the Paste button to restore them at some other point in the sequence If you use Cut a second time the clipboard is cleared and the newly removed files are placed on it Paste Press this button to insert all files from the clipboard after the selected file in the slide sequence Slides on clipboard 180 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This shows you how many slide files are currently on the clipboard
188. d Contains proprietary and confidential information 495 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 496 Select active part This box lists all the Parts that can be coupled to Polygons i e all Lagrange ALE and Shell Parts You can select a Part in this list New Press this button to create a new Polygon Delete Press this button to delete the selected Polygon Velocity Press this button to apply a velocity to the selected node Porosity Press this button to set porosity for the selected Polygon Add First Point only visible when no points are defined Use this option to generate the first point for the selected Polygon use shift right mouse button to place the point Select Point Use this option to select a point of the selected Polygon use shift right mouse button to select the point Add Point After Use this option to add a point after the selected polygon point use shift right mouse button to place the point If you place the added point close to a node on the surface of the selected active Part the point will automatically be attached to that node If you immediately follow this by placing a second point close to another surface node of the same selected active Part multiple points will be generated attached to all surface nodes between the two placed nodes in an anti clockwise direction Insert Point Before Use this option to insert a po
189. d One rigid material e Select All Parts e Start Task 1 e Number Tasks 1 3 Unstructured Parts 1 Euler Part Structured e Manual assignment of Euler Part to Task r e Automatic assignment of 2 unstructured Parts rod and first target o Start Task 2 o Task 2 Automatic assignment of unstructured Part second target o Start Task 4 o Tasks 1 550 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Automatic decomposition of Euler FCT parts The automatic decomposition algorithm has been extended to incorporate Euler FCT parts in addition to its present ability to handle unstructured grids This facilitates the decomposing of complicated Euler FCT Lagrange coupled models the user need only stipulate the number of tasks over which the model should be assigned and AUTODYN will automatically produce a decomposition configuration with good load balancing qualities and minimal inter processor communication Furthermore to further enhance the efficiency of coupled calculations the subdomains of the Lagrange structure will be placed on the same processor so decreasing the necessary inter processor communication To automatically decompose an Euler FCT model go to the Parallel dialog panel as seen below activate parallel processing and add a new decomposition set wh
190. d during your session 20 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview HTML review windows While working on a model you may want a summary of particular data such as material properties detonation point or gauge point locations These are created as an HTML document and displayed in a browser window You can easily insert these documents into reports and publications Material Name STEEL 1006 Equation of State Shock Reference density 7 89600E 00 Gruneisen coefficient 2 17000E 00 none Parameter C1 4 56900E 01 cmlus Parameter S1 1 49000E 00 none Parameter Quad 52 0 00000E 00 us cm Relative volume VE 0 00000E 00 none Relative volume VB 0 00000E 00 none Parameter C2 0 00000E 00 cmlus Parameter S2 0 00000E 00 none eae 3 00000E 02 K Specific Heat 4 52000E 06 Terg gK Thermal Conductivity 0 00000E 00 Terg cmK Strength Johnson Cook Shear Modulus 8 18000E 01 Mbar Yield Stress 3 50000E 03 Mbar Hardening Constant 2 75000E 03 Mbar Hardening Exponent 3 60000E 01 none Strain Rate Constant 2 20000E 02 none mati Lo aA Ac a __ _ _ _ Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and c
191. d its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Materials Modify Material Color E Modify Material Color This dialog lets you modify a material color 1 Select the material whose color you wish set from the list top left 2 Choose the dial mode you wish to use to set the color e HSV _ Hue Saturation Value e RGB Red Green Blue 3 Use the three dials at the bottom of the window to set the color As you turn the dials the top right window displays the color that will be used Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 125 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Contour Settings Contour Contour Plot Settings EEGA 0 00 la u 126 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This panel lets you set the following options for contour plots some options are not present for 2D models Contour variable Press this button to open the Select Contour Variable dialog window allowing you to choose the variable you want to contour Profile window Check this box to open the Profile Plot dialog window allowing you to compose and display a profile plot Smoothing Check this box if
192. diaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual You can define new Initial Condition Sets by pressing the Init Cond button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing next to the option in this window 436 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Translate Translate group zoning Translate This window lets you translate all nodes associated with the current group in XYZ space X Y Z distance Input the X Y and Z components of the translation in these fields Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 437 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Rotate Rotate group zoning This window lets you rotate all nodes associated with the current group about an axis in XYZ space Rotation Input the rotation angle in degrees X Y Z axis Specify the axis about which the nodes will be rotated 438 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Scale Scale group zoning This window lets you scale all nodes associated with the current group re
193. displayed D Pressing this icon lets you set colors for each material using the Modify Material Color dialog window Smooth multi materials Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 123 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box to show smooth multi material interfaces Material visibility Check the boxes for materials you want to be visible in the view Fragment plot Check this box to view a fragment plot Fragment plots only show elements that contain material that has not failed Pressing the Output fragment analysis button causes fragment data to be output to a file The fragment output post processing option is now available for all solvers including the unstructured solvers Simulation of fragmentation of a grenade modeled using unstructured tet elements Cracked plot Check this box to view a cracked material plot A cracked material plot shows all elements that contain material with damage above the specified Damage level Opacity This slider lets you set the opacity for your view An opacity of 1 0 means you cannot see inside the grid An opacity of 0 0 is equivalent to turning hidden line removal off i e you can see everything inside the grid 124 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc an
194. ds are the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Grade zoning along length Check this box if you want to grade the zoning along the length of your cylinder you will be asked to specify a starting increment to use Ogive 254 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Define Zoning el e Type Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your ogive Type 1 Type 2 The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 255 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but some of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Cells across radius Enter the number of cells elements you want to use across the radius of your ogive in this field Number of elements Displayed below the input fields is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Sphere 256 ia Part Wizard Projectile Define Zoning Mesh Type C Typel Typ
195. e 2 Cells across radius nF Imax 17 Jmax 17 Kmax 17 Nodes 4913 Elements 4096 Mesh Type Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select a iF Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your sphere Type 2 The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but some of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Cells across radius Enter the number of cells elements you want to use across the radius of your sphere in this field Number of elements Displayed below the input fields is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Hex Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 257 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual la Part Wizard one Define Zoning Cells in direction vi Cells in J direction A Cells in K direction vi Nodes 8 Elements 1 Automatic C lJK straight Geometric Ratio 1 000000 J Geometric Ratio 1 000000 K Geometric Ratio 1 000000 Cells in I J K direction Enter the nu
196. e Settings ALSTODYN ID v6 0 BETA from Century Dynamics Maternal Locator Peispe Onn STEEL Settings 1 0000 ALUMINUM Stale oandieting Set large 3D modekt Mow Standerd shal layer to plot 2 Sides Componte shel layer to piot fi View Slides B wie Setup 7 Graded shang Materials Select goded beckground colmar E fol Boundanes Paits Component Shading Troe Fis zi Groups JLighting control Jom Cunerk Light Soe T a Interaction 5 M v Light Source 1 BOiectonad gt Detonation ann CightScurce 2 yoke Source 3 Time 0 000E 009 ps L TAN OBLIQUE IMPACT OF STEEL ONTO ALUMINUM a Ut Ecusce 4 Mil Show Light Sourcex Ferbsent Light Coelbcieri 000 t Oifture Light Coctticiert r000 Specie Light Coefficient 00000 SPH Particles Controls for the display of SPH particles are only shown when the model contains SPH parts In this section the controls for displaying the points with anti aliasing and illuminated points are accessible In addition control of particle display size and amount of fade for outliers can be set The figures below compare plots with and without the illuminated points option active Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 113 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual SPH representation without SPH representation with Illuminated Points Il
197. e file New Sequence File This option opens a new sequence file Open Sequence File This option opens an existing sequence file Edit Sequence This option lets you insert and delete animations in the current sequence file The following dialog window appears when you select this option Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 31 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual lt START gt 0 0 BUMPER GIF 5 0 CRUSH GIF 5 0 CERAMI GIF Delay s Delete Insert 4 5 00 Sequence list The box at the top of this dialog contains a list of the animations currently included in the sequence together with their time delay how long the first slide in the sequence is shown in seconds Insert Press this button to insert another animation immediately after the selected animation Delete Press this button to delete the selected animation Delay Enter a time delay in this field in seconds When you Insert an animation this time delay is applied You can create and edit sequence files manually if you wish Sequence files must have a seq extension and use the following format Format Example The number of animations 3 in the sequence 32 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates
198. e gamma exponent is written to the output file and an exponential function is set for color transfer in the printer Each rendered color is then gamma corrected at print time Postcomputing the gamma correction only increases the file size by a few bytes but it will slow down printing The gamma factor can be edited by hand after the file has been generated Gamma exponent Use this field to specify the gamma factor to be applied to color components either precomputed in the output file or postcomputed by the printer during printing The gamma factor is an exponential factor applied to each color component independently gray red green blue Its value must be greater than 0 0 A value of 1 0 leaves color unchanged values between 0 0 and 1 0 darken the colors and values greater than 1 0 lighten desaturate the colors The default value is 1 8 64 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Numerical Precision Float Precision Use this field to specify the floating point precision used to write real values to the output file The values include spatial coordinates and transformations but not colors The value must be in the range 1 to 8 The default value is 4 Color Precision Use this field to specify the floating point precision used to write color values to the output file The
199. e lower region of the panel Solver settings This dialog lets change some solver settings for the current Part Type Press this button to change the type of solver used Solution Press this button to change the solution type associated with some solvers Dezone Press this button to perform dezoning for 2D Lagrange and Euler solvers and for 3D Lagrange ALE and Euler solvers Jetting Press this button to add the Jetting option to a 2D shell see the Jetting Tutorial for details 362 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Type ia Modify Solver Type X Current solver type Lagrange New solver type Lagrange C ALE Fill This window lets you change the type of solver assigned to the current Part You can only change to a solver compatible with the current solver used for the Part Current solver type This line shows you the current solver type New solver type A list of the solver types compatible with the current solver type if any is shown Select the solver type you want to use from this list Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 363 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN U
200. e small 8 characters or large 16 characters In addition to the MSC NASTRAN bulk data input AUTODYN can recognize the expanded input data set for explicit transient dynamics as given by MSC DYTRAN version 4 7 80 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The primary use of the MSC NASTRAN reader is to allow you to define a mesh to be used with the unstructured solvers In addition other information regarding material definitions boundary conditions and initial conditions can be imported and stored in AUTODYN An overview of the information which can be imported into AUTODYN from an MSC NASTRAN bulk data file is given below Mesh The mesh represented as nodal positions and element connectivity is read into AUTODYN and sorted to produce Parts and Components A part is a collection of connected elements of the same classification e g volume elements shell elements and beam elements A component is a collection of all connected elements regardless of their topology Materials Each element imported from the bulk data file will have the material name as defined on the property field for the element PSOLID PSHELL Corresponding materials will be automatically generated during the import of the keyword file into AUTODYN In general except for the material
201. e the model in AUTODYN to that in the currently selected project page item use the Update Model from Workbench option found in the Import menu or on the toolbar This function will update the parts that are in AUTODYN to reflect the mesh in Workbench If a part contains a single material then the updated parts will be refilled with any materials and initial conditions that are associated New parts are added to the model as appropriate deleted parts should be manually removed from the AUTODYN model Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 43 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview AUTODYN solver options in Workbench There are a number of AUTODYN solver options which may be changed by right mouse click the Setup cell of the AUTODYN system Precision Note that by default the single precision version of AUTODYN will be used To run in double precision from the ANSYS Workbench project schematic right click the Setup cell of the AUTODYN system and select Properties after which the Properties window will pop up where you can select what type of executable you want to run Directory CE User Executable Location By default Workbench will start the standard AUTODYN executable You may also choose an executable created with a user subroutine To run your own user executable from the proje
202. each material in the cell This method is currently only applied if there are two materials in the cell and these materials are defined by ideal gas or fully burnt JWL material If this criterion is not met in a cell the pressure averaging option is used Average The resultant cell pressure is calculated from a weighted average of the pressure of the individual materials in the cell The weighting algorithm takes account of both the volume fraction of each material and the relative stiffness of each material This is the default method Global Cutoffs Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 579 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Global Cutoffs Minimum Velocity 1 000000e 006 Maximum velocity 1 004988e 010 Radius cutoff 0 001000 These options let you set global cutoffs The default values are usually good if you are using the default units mm mg ms You may want to change one or more of these defaults if you are using some other set of units Minimum Velocity Enter the minimum velocity cutoff you want to use If any velocity drops below this value it is set to zero Maximum Velocity Enter the maximum velocity you want to use If any velocity rises above this value it is set to this value This option is sometimes useful if your problem develops high velocities which result in a small ti
203. eck the boxes for each row of the matrix Press Amy to apply the changes you make to the matrix Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 449 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Merge Joined Nodes The option of merging joined unstructured nodes will merge the multiple joined nodes that reside at the same physical location in the model into one single unstructured node Since trajectory contact does not allow the use of joined unstructured nodes in the contact the merge option can be used to remove joins from the model Bonded connections are recommended over node to node joins for unstructured models Define Joins Node to Node Connections 450 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Bonded Face Connections Bonded contact allows the nodes of an unstructured Part to be bonded to a face of another unstructured Part Bonded contact alleviates the requirement that for joining purposes two nodes need to reside at the same physical location The nodes that are to be bonded to a face may have an offset with respect to the face and the offset is a user defined maximum physical normal distance of a node from a face which can be bonded
204. ective friction coefficient u is used which is given by 4 4l 44 4g E where Hs Static Ha dynamic coefficient of friction B exponential decay coefficient v relative sliding velocity at point of contact Press sa to set the friction coefficient between the two selected Parts You can apply this procedure as many times as you like to set coefficients between other Parts without exiting the window Note that friction is not available for Interaction defined by Group Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 471 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Lagrange Lagrange 2D Gap Contact Options 2 Interactions amp Lagrange Lagrange Type External Gap When a 2D model contains structured elements only the 2D gap contact must be used to define Lagrange Lagrange interactions 472 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual An analysis model that contains a mix of structured IJK Lagrangian Parts and unstructured Lagrangian Parts can currently not be run with Gap contact and also not with Trajectory contact To be able to use Trajectory contact the analysis model must contain unstructured Lagrangian volume Pa
205. ed Contains proprietary and confidential information 487 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The Trajectory contact algorithm is implemented for all unstructured Lagrangian solvers and SPH Method Method in which a contacting node is pushed back to the true contact position during the computational cycle There are three methods available 1 None No contact defined 2 Penalty If a contact event is detected a local penalty force is calculated to push the node back to the face Equal and opposite forces are calculated on the nodes of the face in order to conserve linear and angular momentum The applied penalty force will push the node back towards the true contact position during the cycle However it will take several cycles to satisfy the contact condition Kinetic energy is not necessarily conserved The conservation of energy can be tracked using the energy time history 3 Decomposition Response DCR All contacts that take place at the same point in time are first detected The response of the system to these contact events is then calculated to conserve momentum and energy During this process forces are calculated to ensure that the resulting position of the nodes and faces does not result in further penetration at that point in time The decomposition response algorithm is more impulsive in a given computational cycle than the penalty method This can give r
206. edral element is a basic constant strain element and can be used with all the standard AUTODYN material models including erosion Explosive burn logic is also available The element is intended as a filler element in meshes dominated by hexahedral elements The element is known to exhibit locking behavior under both bending and constant volumetric straining i e plastic flow If possible the element should therefore not be used in such cases The ANP tetrahedral element is an extension of the advanced tetrahedral element Burton 1996 and can be used as a majority element in the mesh The ANP tetrahedral overcomes problems of volumetric locking which occur with the SCP tetrahedral element However the ANP tetrahedral element is still susceptible to shear locking in bending dominated problems You should therefore be careful to verify their results in such cases For meshes containing a majority of tetrahedral elements the ANP option is recommended Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Material Modeling Options Available with ANP Tet Elements Hydro Pmin Rigid Steinberg Guinan RHT Concrete Johnson Holmquist Johnson Cook RIT Concrete Crack Softening MO Granviar J yperelasio SS Parts containing ANP tetrahedral elements should only be filled wi
207. eeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeenees Plots View range and slices Structured ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeees View range and slices SPH Unstructured ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees SSO THINGS So ccs ces ces Sade aes cw states ale a Cad dudes as Dads seas Sania Cua Nate cud dads teat Padecwentecs SEWING isch ete sid ceteris tasted eddie AE E tase seis E deca Cade td Se bad alesse Settings DiS pla Visser tic cen sates hikes cee titan tle cee eds inh See bok Sanat aa tak oe S12 14116 SE e app EA E ET circireimen cm ree AEE Settings Legend ence ar een ae Ome eae nn ar CORE aT SOREN ar OOO aT Coen OAT EMER OHE Cone are MER SRE RT Settings Node Element NUMbEIG ccccccccccccccceceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess Mat rias ne aaa initia Oia Seis e a a a niente e a Settings Materials sictrisicinenatienrnatineninthincniatinenatinennainerinicineaiataiseniaicincataes Settings Materials Modify Material Color ccccceceeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeee io 9 20 amrrenererere Meena eee ee eee eee ON ee ee Cer Tee Ce Teer Tee CRTC rr Tee iv Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings CONtoU s pects ake cesp rect iets aaiae aaide tsa het ett 126 Settings Contour Profile Plot cccccceeceeeeeseeeee
208. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 129 Settings Velocity VOCION Soak ee ara Ai deaa tect euang Re acne a eeeeed 131 Settings GAY OE DOUM seid corset e cesta Gale eco a ai Ua lated eaii iii 133 Settings BOUNGDAIY cca bc sins cess dad dom igen dacascens denen ddedtlat deanna teste dsatbeies 135 DOINGS HAOIN Stier ttc tatct clea cea eee dia tcc iueiels cla teerate tla htict ates 136 Settings AXCS eeecccceeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeaeeeeeeeeneseeesaeeeaaeeeeeseeseesseeeeaeeeeees 137 Settings SION AU ON a cee eer ces eee ee ee eed 139 Settings Eroded Nodes inn tearinninenian au aan eee 140 Settings Unused Regions ccecceeeeeseseeecceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeseessesseeeeeaeeeeees 141 Settings ROIWGONS occ ces essen totter ees etree Ba clit ee Eek cur eat coe B al oo 143 Settings Beam Sections as 45 xesce02 egtsuahsuasceezcepteuel kg veeasete eet geaeeev nese nares 144 Settings Shell Thickness cies a hae ee eee heh Ae ee A Sd 149 Settings Material Direction a 4 aca sansa canAsacacavaLanndavass 150 Settings MAIKO Behera ashi ate cte Se ate nsae Manhattan dl dale tanbts 152 Settings Shell Normal sccicceicisceet teeta cleictecuieieicioieee E E A AAG 155 Settings Part Highlights rsispa anar alee an ap anaE o it 156 FISTO Tainas a a a a A E A A AAA 158 PALS RONG sipsti a NA ANN 158 History Single Variable Plot ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 161 History Reduce se eos ad
209. eeeeeeenneeeeeeeees 316 Parts Zoning Fill Block Explicit 20 2 2 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeees 318 ee ee ee ee eee ee ce 320 are Coase a Peer pee eee Ome rere re een rye ne eee epee Pana Perera een 320 Parts Fill BlOCK pssst dese beside sles neiaa anii aa a aai aiaa 322 Parts Fill 1 J K Plane okie eee cadet aie dee aida ena 324 Parts Fill NOdG 243i2steiitstn tte dt bait tained 326 Pt iS MS ete Ne Le he AN te eee Nee 328 GOMPOSING ccs cuca reece cots sees Sante cuca vasataed teds cues Cavlestues Yate suas tale Cant Uadeeuan eda teat tadaceet ters 329 Parts Fill Composite ee icesihceseisiid sesicsese case nc ede nal ad esi ahead aease Sette 329 Parts Fillo MUI Ella e tena San ted oa 333 Parts Fill Datafile 6 2 ex aiertesiesetde cece etetcant 2 tcanedetaennhisaencdeeemiatdaseennsten terete 335 Parts Pill Parte sO tee e Sema ae nee eee ee a ake 340 Parts Fill Block Remap a2 c62 041 ch alee Nal Wal Nala 342 Boundary esiin fe bei inetga ii aren i aa i a doen echoes eatieecceatoacite 347 Parts Boundaiy e m a E E A E a A A E E hie tat el elet ay 347 Parts Boundary BIOCK cccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 348 Parts Boundary 1 J K Plane fects fk eee hee Ah he Ne ee 349 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information vii of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11
210. eeseeeeeeeeees Parts New Define Zoning 2D cceeeeeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeteeeeteseeeeeeeeeeees Parts New Define Zoning 3D ccccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Parts New Define Zoning 3D Shell eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees Parts New Fill Part 2 Dyes sazcuet cancteseegtoeactez axes ckahouete tet teeetat ete etees tate Parts News Pill Pall ian n ecstatic deltas a dated ete Parts New Fill Part Shell sac se teceescceetend dcaeccng coated edie iceeteted Natit ccamidtensy Parts Copy wii csr ast eae ath adit ates e ad eh s ead a nS Parts Delete 2 2hc tee t taba dite dtne daa ddniden dd PS I EE e A Nee Nee ee Ne Ne Ne ee eke Pans AGI V ANON zie cies toes seat Sts cece tastavtect tials cues Cade vnat Votasuas tate an a Parts Rename eid etcacich esse see eet Sede ce ei ede Seid sects ade dd ec bab eins Pane PNM ssortoc sat ot eta tas ct teas eee sas bot Seed an eit Dan eit ben bok 2 PUES Zoning BOX oe betes os dered Sad cte senate Ves iret capil ea cee da aun Maton doatoaise Parts ZONING GVM Ch e iui are a a a AEA ENEA A idigiai eta ta edie tat ade Parts Zoning Sphere eeceeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesneaeeeeeeees Pts ZOMG OIG ese eet ee eh th Ne he eh Re vi Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Publis
211. efine a detonation sphere axial symmetry Manual Press this button to manually define initiation times for blocks of elements Delete Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 517 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to delete the selected detonation definition Review Press this button to review information for all detonation definitions Path Select whether you want detonation times to be calculated using direct or indirect paths Direct Path Detonation times are computed from straight line paths from detonation points This is the most accurate method but is only valid if the straight line paths are through the explosive material Indirect Path Detonation times are calculated from shortest paths through explosive material Paths are automatically computed around inert materials e g wave shapers Plot detonation points Check this box if you want to see the location of detonation points in the view panel 518 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 2D Point ia Define detonations Define Node x 0 000000 x 0 000000 Compute Initiation Time Yes No Initiation Time 0 000000
212. eft choose as many histories as you wish to display in the plot use the control and shift keys in the usual way to make your selection Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 161 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The choices you have available for variables and histories will depend on the type of plot you have chosen Gauge points Material Summaries etc 162 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Reduce E Reduce history file E e K Ident 0 ben3dl It is usual to save history data very frequently the default is every cycle in order to capture high frequency responses If a calculation is run for a large number of cycles the history files can become very large This window lets you reduce the size of history files by removing data for some cycles Select file In this box select the ident of the file you wish to reduce in size Reduce by Specify the reduction factor in this field If you specify a reduction factor of 2 data for every other cycle will be removed from the file If you specify a reduction factor of 3 data for two out of every three cycles will be removed from the file Release 12 1 2009
213. ell again will start uo AUTODYN in the required mode Notes e Model Name The database for an AUTODYN model will now always be admodel_0 ad The project name is the now unique identifier for all databases see below e 2D 3D symmetry By default the AUTODYN application assumes you are performing a 3D simulation in the default unit set mm mg ms To define 2D axial or planar symmetry use the Setup Symmetry option in the toolbar after start up of the AUTODYN application Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 37 38 AUTODYN User Manual AD ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODY mem Execution Viev Description Model symmetry 20 30 j Symmetry Symone Arial aD Modify symmetry View eerie Initial Conditions Plots Boundary Settings Parts History Slides ying View Slides Interactions Detonation Setup Paralel Materials Controls Init Cond Output Boundaries User Variables or Mewes e Saving a project To save a model the recommended approach is to save the Workbench project either from within the AUTODYN application File Save Project or from the project page of Workbench This ensures all data used in the AUTODYN Simulation is saved to disk e Exporting an AUTODYN database The AUTODYN database restart file can be exported to a f
214. ement Only 204 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Nodal displacements from an ANSYS linear static solution are used to initialize the AUTODYN nodal positions These displacements are converted to constant nodal velocities and applied for a pre defined time in order to obtain the required displaced co ordinates During this time elements stress strains are calculated as normal by AUTODYN Once the displaced nodal positions are achieved all nodal velocities are set to 0 and the solution is completely initialized e This option is applicable to unstructured solids hexahedral and tetrahedral shells and beams e This option is only applicable to results from a linear static structural analysis e Linear elastic materials only can be used in the explicit analysis when using the Displacement Only Option e Note that after AUTODYN model initialization static damping Controls gt Damping Options gt Static Damping needs to be applied to change the AUTODYN calculation from a dynamic solution to a state of stress equilibrium For optimal convergence the value chosen for the damping constant R may be defined by R 2 timestep T where timestep is the expected average value of the timestep and T is the longest period of vibration for the system being analyzed Material State Nod
215. ement of Euler and ALE parts e For simplicity with multi material Euler Godunov grids the material volume fraction of an original cell is assigned to all the new cells created from that original cell Thus the material interface on the new grid may not be exactly the same as that on the original grid e For ALE grids the original motion constraint of the ALE nodes is not retained during the refining procedure The motion constraint for all the new nodes is set to Lagrange even if the constraint of the original node is for example Equipotential The user will therefore need to re define the motion constraints for ALE parts following the refining process The cell index for time history gauge points is also updated during the refinement Furthermore the mass is always conserved between the original and refined parts However the momentum and kinetic energy in Lagrange and ALE parts may not be conserved exactly because the mesh refinement modifies the nodal masses and thus affects the momentum and kinetic energy calculation For Euler Godunov and Euler FCT parts since the cell mass is used to calculate both the kinetic energy and momentums refinement does not affect the calculation The kinetic energy and momentums should therefore always be conserved An example of the refinement of a Lagrangian part is shown below Note that the refinement factors IFACT JFACT and KFACT have been set to 1 2 and 3 respectively Release 12 1 2009 SA
216. ently executing and which are waiting in line to execute The status of the executing job is also displayed at the foot of the window Stop Press this button to stop running jobs in the Job List Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 91 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual View Pull down Menu View MB ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN File Import Setup Execution i Seals S View History Graphs p Select Pate Sideshow Performance Profiler A WBhody 22 VOLome very me WBbody 23 VOLUME 3743 ML History This pull down menu lets you customize your view what you see in the View panel Most of these options are accessible through the Navigation Bar Plots Lets you set up what you want to see in the View panel Plot Settings View Options Help Plots A La Plot settings gt Display i Grid plot History Graphs Materials Slideshow Contour Velocity vector Performance Profiler Gauge point Boundary Joins Axes Detonation Lets you change settings for the various plot types that control how you view your model You can change settings for the following plot types Display Grid Materials Contour 92 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and
217. er the activation time for the Part in this field The Part will not be computed until this activation time is reached Deactivation Time Enter the deactivation time for the Part in this field The Part will not be computed after this deactivation time is reached Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 275 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Rename Rename Part Paine ORE This window lets you rename a Part Type the new name for the Part in the field provided 276 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Print Select Print Range From To l From J Tojs From K To K LO This window lets you set the index range of a structured Part you want to use for grid data written to the print file prt for this Part You can set the frequency at which this data is written by cycle or times in the Output panel press Output on the Navigation Bar Index Range Specify the index range for print data for this Part in the fields provided Print order Use this pull down menu to set the order in which data will be printed e g IKJ means J will vary faster than K and K will vary faster than I Release
218. eserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Print Format Press this button to select the formatting of the information written to the print file Grid Variables Press this button to select the grid variables written to the print file Log file Log file on Yes No Turn the Log file on or off Call EXEDIT Call EXEDIT Cycles Times Start cycle 1000000 End cycle 11000000 Increment 11000000 Run EXEDIT now Set the frequency at which subroutine EXEDIT is called Run EXEDIT now Press this button to call the EXEDIT user subroutine Field output Field output Cycles Times Start cycle 1000000 End cycle 1000000 Increment 11000000 Set part Set the frequency at which field output is written for weak coupling analyses Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 563 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Output Part Summary Variables The Part summary variable includes three sets of optional data e Contact energy e Hourglass energy e External forces This data is accumulated per Part and is available for review via the print file using the energy summary option or as time history data using the Part summary option Note that by default t
219. eserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 227 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter coordinates of the fourth point of the quad 228 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Select Predef 3D This window lets you select the Predef you want to use for the 3D Part you are creating Press one of the six buttons at the top of this window to select your Predef Box a Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Cylinder Ogive Sphere Hex Frag Brick Define Geometry origin Y origin 0 000000 Z origin This predef is a box with its axes parallel to the X Y and Z axes Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates of the lower corner of the box in the fields provided Box Dimensions Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 229 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the dimensions of the box DX DY DZ in the fields provided Cylinder 230 kd Part Wizard one Select Predef H Ogive Sphere Hex Frag Brick Define Geometry Cylinder Whole C Half C Quarter R end Solid Hollow x origin
220. essed Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 17 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Command File Window E Command File Beta AUTODYN IDENT command file PARTS WBBODY 1 ONE NEV PART Nane plate SOLVER Lagrange I MAX J MAX K MAX ZONING 2 OPERATION TYPE Zoning ZONING Predef PREDEF GEOMETRY Box 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 0 0000000E 00 1 000000 1 000000 1 000000 GRADING I NO GRADING J N GRADING K HO D0 FILL SOPERATION TYPE Fill FILL BY INDEX Block I min The command file window allows you to open an existing AUTODYN command file using the File button The commands can be executed modified in a number of ways Select all or a number of the commands and press the process button Alternatively if you want to modify the commands before execution simply select the required commands The commands are then copied to either the single command line or the Commands to be processed list if the command line is not docked to the main Ul The commands can then be modified before execution by either pressing return on the single command line or the process button in the Command line panel 18 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and
221. esults carefully when using the Johnson Holmauist material model in the remapping procedure Write Datafile Select this option if you want to write fill data for the current Part to a fil file Read Datafile Select this option if you want to read fill data for the current Part from a previously written fil file Filename Enter the file name in this field do not append fil An example of a shaped charge analysis is shown in the below The formation of the shaped charge jet is first modeled using the multi material Euler solver in AUTODYN 2D as shown below A remap data file is created at the desired wrapup time AUTODYN 20 4 3 from Cergury Dynamic TEMP 1 Det Formation of shape charge jet in AUTODYN 2D The analysis can then be continued using AUTODYN 3D In this example a Lagrange part is first created and zoned in order that the part will completely enclose the volume occupied by the shaped charge jet At this stage the part is not filled and all cells are left as unused Note that it is recommended that cell sizes are chosen such that at least 4 filled elements will exist across the radius of the shaped charge jet These cell sizes can be determined by examining the geometry at the wrapup cycle of the AUTODYN 2D analysis Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 337 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTOD
222. et ne a ne ents 5 Overview Dialog Panel and Dialog Windows ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 Overview Command Line Panel cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeeeeees 12 Overview Undock Command Line cccceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeeeeeeeeees 16 Overview Command File Window ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennteeeeeeeees 18 Overview Message Panel cccccceseesseseeceeeeeeeeeeeseenaaeeeeeeeeeeeesessnnaaaeeeeeeees 20 Overview HTML review WINGOWS ccccccccccccececceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeess 21 Overview File Names cisintsatinirinitincainitintsinitictaialtintainidintaiattuntainiteneaiattintainists 22 Overview On Line help sssssssssssssesrssssesetrnnntrrsesrrtrnnnntrseerrttnnnnnnneeeerrennnnn n 23 Overview Supported Operating Systems and Compilers cccccccceeeeees 24 Overview Initialization Settings eeeeeeeseceeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 25 SIDE VIGWEMxcuctcci casei ccac tes Mentendtints ibecusccehedue tebe cerednaelenecusccenedatedenectett 30 Overview AUTODYN in Workbench cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeees 35 Overview AUTODYN solver options in Workbench cccceceeceeeeetteeeeeeeees 44 Pull down Menus mene eRe ee OREM ne OREM RET ORE ARE CREME ORE ATE ME OnE ERE Ri ORE MOE TERE RE OREN TT 45 Pulldown MENUS wanine le abe it ie
223. etary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Lets you define and modify Parts Components Lets you define and modify Components Groups Lets you define and modify Groups Joins Lets you define joins Interactions Lets you define interactions Detonation Lets you define detonation points Parallel AUTODYN User Manual Lets you set up your parallel processing environment and prepare your model for parallel processing Controls Lets you set various controls for your model such as run limits timestep controls damping constants cutoffs and gravitational forces Output Lets you select the output you want from your model User Variables Lets you initialize any grid variables you want to use in your user subroutines Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 85 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Setup Description Kl Modify Heading gB Ident w ben3d1 Heading s OBLIQUE IMPACT OF STEEL ONTO ALUMINUM Description Length Mass Time mm C mg ie us om ie g ms cm kg C s Current Time 0 000000 This window lets you modify the description of your model Ident This field lets you change the ident for your model The ident you choose is used to identify all the files created for your
224. etary and confidential information 231 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 232 ia Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Cylinder Il Sphere Hex Frag Brick Define Geometry Ogive Whole C Half C Quarter f Solid C Hollow origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000 Outer End Rad A end 0 000000 Outer Ogive Rad A og 0 000000 This predef is an ogive with its axis parallel to the Z axis Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow ogive If you choose a hollow ogive you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the ogive Origin Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of your ogive in the fields provided End Radius Enter the end radius of your ogive in this field Ogive Radius Enter your ogive radius in this field Sphere i Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Cylinder Ogive IiE Hex Frag Brick Define Geometry Whole Half C Quarter Eighth e Solid C Hollow gt origin Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000
225. etary and confidential information 259 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual If you do not check this box elements will be generated for the mortar if the mortar thickness is small compared to the dimension of the brick elements the time step is likely to be reduced significantly 260 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Define Zoning 3D Shell This window lets you Define the zoning for your Shell Part Plane E Part Wizard sh1 Define Zoning Cells in direction Cells in y direction Nodes 4 Elements 1 V Grade zoning in x direction Fixed size dx 1 0 000000 Times nl Centred Lowerl Upper x Fixed size dy 1 0 000000 Times nJ Centred Lowerd UpperJ Cells Enter the number of cells elements you want to use in the X Y Z directions in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Grade zoning Check the boxes if you want to grade your zoning in any direction Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 261 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODY
226. etpeer eset aerate 410 Components Clear BOUNGArY eecceceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaeaeeeeeeees 411 Components Translates asa aca k al eon sa Naas i anasal ais 412 Components Rotate inca cd ade toca dncntdendn det cede cnddndededlnedeceddendecnidandeandlcedadnedenisle 413 Components S dlE ee cite ec taicle a a steal E A aS 414 CGo omponents Copy er aa a a aaa E a r tee gens alee eter 415 GOUS se a r e a A a at tuss ted tees baletuen tas 416 GOUS ai S NA EE 416 Groups NeW issin E acta ate E hats alesse ats 427 Groups FGM ANIC Sioa rece sc ccsete wepenntncnteexteeepessesoctnex eeceieaspiandeassoextnssbbecieneeeninevbled 428 Groups CODY sas ciecee ape aatelte es a e a aa eee ee 429 Groups s Deletes renann nanaman es eae alate adie seeded tae e adits a ecto 430 Groups S AOI sicesicgse ees Sette std iniiai iii eai i aai aat 431 Groups e Clea m a aa aa Aa a aA aa Aa hailed ai iiS 432 Groups Material eonsnnneneeeeeeeesnennrrrteeesrtrrtnrrrterrrrrttnnnnnesetrtnnnnnnnnseenrrnn nnn 433 COUP EAA A A A 434 Gro ps Initial COnitiOM vsisi iieiaei 435 Groups Translate sas se ci cetenieisec eric ected tic ede a acetic esi ade eidase detained 437 GIOUPS ROGIC 624i tis cence Patek here ta hd inh ae hk baat Sas ted Sy 438 RS OUDS SCA Ceasers tai td eons ededacenes eana s l Sememedetaennhlcaecnrdepeuretdeseenestee eeeeded 439 0 ac eae RR Ae ro Et AAT EEE O etn Be CORED TAT RET AE COREE O E ORT TET 440 OIG ote n
227. ets you choose the Predef you want to use The second dialog window lets you define your zoning The third dialog window lets you fill your part Press Ne D to advance through the dialog windows then press Yin the last window to create your Part Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Select Predef 2D This window lets you select the Predef you want to use for the 2D Part you are creating Press one of the five buttons at the top of this window to select your Predef Box ia Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Circle Ogive Wedge Rhombus Quad Define Geometry Box X origin Y origin DX 1 0 000000 DY 1 0 000000 7 X Y This predef is a box with its axes parallel to the X and Y axes Origin Enter the X and Y coordinates of the lower corner of the box in the fields provided Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 221 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Box Dimensions Enter the dimensions of the box DX DY in the fields provided Circle ia Part Wizard one Select Predef gt i Ogive Wedge Rhombus Quad Define Geometry who
228. f ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Displayed below the input field is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Quad la Part Wizard one Define Zoning Cells in direction vi Cells in J direction A Nodes 4 Elements 1 fe Automatic J straight Geometric Ratio 1 000000 J Geometric Ratio 1 000000 Cells in I J direction Enter the number of cells elements you want to use in the and J directions in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Automatic Select this option if you want the internal nodes to be spaced equipotentially lJ Straight Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 249 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select this option if you want the nodes along each and J line to be equally spaced along a straight line Geometric Ratios Input geometric ratios in the fields provided if you want to grade the zoning instead of generating equally spaced nodes 250 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New
229. f application lJ range Enter the IJ range you want to use to limit the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided 522 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 2D Circle ia Define detonations Define Circle x 0 000000 Y 0 000000 Radius 0 000000 Initiation Time 0 000000 Range will Include Exclude BLAST WALL IJK range From To l From J To J This window lets you define a detonation circle detonation propagates radially inward and outward from the surface of the circle Center X Y Enter the X and Y coordinates of the center of your circle in the fields provided Radius Enter the radius of your circle in this field Initiation Time Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 523 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented Range will Include Exclude region For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of
230. f specified will be used to check for element erosion Global Erosion by Failure o The user can turn on erosion by material failure for all materials Using erosion by timestep will activate the element timestep variable which can be used in post processing Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 587 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5
231. fidential information 397 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Geometry Translate Transform SPH Geometry E Translate x translation 0 000000 Y translation 0 000000 Z translation 0 000000 Enter the distance in the X Y and Z direction to translate the currently selected part or parts 398 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Geometry Rotate Transform SPH Geometry xi Rotate Are X axis C Y axis C Z axis Specify the angle in degrees defining the rotation about the selected axis either X Y or Z Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 399 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Components Component Definitions Comp New Modify Delete Review Selected Component Comp1 Fill Material Velocity Init Conditions Boundary Apply Boundary Clear Boundary Transformations Translate Rotate Scale Operations Copy Delete A Component is a group of structured and unstructured Parts to which you can collectively apply operations This panel lets you define Components and use them to perform variou
232. filiates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Solution 2D SPH kad SPH Solution Options X Quadratic viscosity 1 000000 Linear viscosity 1 000000 Smoothing length Constant C Variable Interface treatment None C Impact Separation Density Calculation Continuity Equation Kemel sum This window lets you set solution options for 2D SPH Parts Quadratic viscosity Enter the coefficient of quadratic viscosity you want to use for SPH computations Linear viscosity Enter the coefficient of linear viscosity you want to use for SPH computations Smoothing Length Specify whether you want to use a constant or variable smoothing length Using a variable smoothing length is not recommended for most calculations Interface treatment Specify if you want to use Impact Separation calculations for the treatment of interfaces between different SPH regions Density Calculation 368 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Specify whether you want to calculate densities using a continuity equation or kernal sum method Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 369 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11
233. fine your own axes Fix axes size Check this box to define your own axes Axis Dimensions Set the min max range for each of your axes Reset This button resets the min max ranges to those automatically set from your model dimensions Intervals Set the number of intervals you want displayed on each of your axes Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 137 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual with your own It is possible for the user to fix the size of the axes in the axes settings panel To reset the axes size to the default use the Reset button The number of intervals on the axis can also be controlled Number of decimal places Enter the number of decimal places to be displayed for the axes Label offset Set the label offset to control the distance between the axes and the labels 138 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Detonation Plot Type Settings Plot type Detonation v Marker scale 10 00 E E Resolution 20 4 m gt This panel lets you set the following options for viewing detonation points Marker scale This slider lets you choose the size of the marker used to show detonation points
234. formation 51 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Time S ms us S ms us Inertia Ib s in Ib ms in_ Ib us in Fore b fb b jb fb _ b Pressure psi psi psi lps psf p impulse ibs ibms ibys lbs ibms bps Wok sf bin bn bn bt bt Jbt Mass Energy Unit lb in lb in Ib in lb ft lb ft lb ft E E l Fracture Ib in Ib in Ib in lb ft lb ft lb ft a e e e e e e Toughness Squared Capacity Conductivity Micron Unit System A new micron um length system has been introduced This can be used in conjunction with a mass unit of picogram pg and time unit of microsecond or millisecond 52 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Manage Folders Pull down Menu File Manage Folders This menu is only available when AUTODYN is started outside Workbench kd Manage Folders max 2d Data Files ADATA2D 3d Data Files DATA3D J 2d Sample Data Files DATA2D S amples 3d Sample Data Files DATA3D5S amples This window lets you manage a list of the folders containing your AUTODYN models You can add and delete folders from this list as your projects change Folder List The scroll box contains a list of the current folders you have selected For each folder y
235. g gap This window lets you create a gap between structured Parts automatically This option doesn t work for unstructured parts and therefore unstructured Parts will not appear in the window Gaps are created by reducing the size of surface elements of the selected Parts so there will be small changes in the mass of the Parts that are modified You may prefer to manually inset gaps using the Translate and or Scale options in the Zoning panel no mass will be lost The box in this window lists all Parts involved in interactions Select the Part s you want to adjust while creating the gaps and press J for AUTODYN to automatically create the gaps Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 461 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Add Add Interaction This window lets you add interactions between one or more Parts This method of adding interactions works well no matter how many Parts you have in your model If you only have a few Parts you may prefer to use a Matrix to choose the interactions Select Part s This box lists all Parts involved in interactions Select one or more Parts in this list Select Part s to interact with the above list 462 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information
236. h changes the AUTODYN calculation from a dynamic solution to a relaxation iteration converging to a state of stress equilibrium For optimal convergence the value chosen for the constant R may be defined by R 2 timestep T where timestep is the expected average value of the timestep and T is longest period of vibration for the system being analyzed Solver Options Solver Options Method for lagrange 4 amp LE Automatic density update Method for Euler Averaged m strain rate 2 Z calculation Method for Euler Averaged v pressure calculation 578 Method for Lagrange ALE density update The element density can be updated each cycle using one of two methods incrementally from the change in volume relative to the last cycle or recalculated based on the current mass and volume of the element If the incremental change in volume over a cycle is small it can be more accurate to use the incremental approach rather than the total approach to updating the density This especially applies to the single precision version of AUTODYN Hence the options are Automatic AUTODYN decides whether it needs to do an incremental update or not based on the change in volume Incremental Force AUTODYN to always use the incremental update Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODY
237. he scale option If a length scale factor of one is chosen each damper will be displayed as half the length as the element Fixed Length If the fixed length option has been selected specify the length of each plotted damper in this field Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 147 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Radius to Length Ratio Set the radius to length ratio of each plotted damper in this field Resolution Set the number of lines used to represent each plotted damper in this field 148 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Shell Thickness Shell Thickness Plot Settings True Shell Thickness Artificial Shell Coupling Thickness This window lets you select the thickness you want to use for rendering shells You can use either the true shell thickness or the artificial thickness that is used for coupling shells to Euler Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 149 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Material Direction Material Direction Settings Material drecton le
238. he user variable you want to define or modify Activate Check this box to activate define the selected user variable User variable name Enter the name you want to use for your user variable Restart Check this box if you want the user variable to be written to the restart Save file Rezone Check this box if you want the user variable to be included in the list of variables that are automatically rezoned Transport Check this box if you want the user variable to be included in the list of variables that are automatically transported in Euler Parts Nodal Variable For the unstructured solvers element and nodal quantities are stored independently Check this box to define a user variable that is associated with a node rather than 572 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual an element for the unstructured solvers Note that nodal user variable data can only be interrogated via examine and time history plots Contour plots are not available Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 573 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Controls Controls Define Solution Controls gt Wrapup Criteria 939999999 0 300000 Cycle
239. hed 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Quad dics it cctecad tnd icnttted lad nh cebtinbianhtladicadd cebicntt init Ams idee 290 Parts Zoning HeX crckoseessienntcndnexehiepentes sdnocn bh ccsens es iddeatoie reset pecbeineees pies 292 Parts Zoning Frag Bric page 1 cite A ce AA A ae 294 Palts Zoning Frag Bric page 2 niei eiin tected iiaa reste iaeiiai 296 Parts Zoning Transition sissies fad ccesehiidienc des ewin bal eekbtdd cite cima idnmnbsiccsats 298 Parts ZOnind NOG e e a a a setae ics ete A A a ARATE 299 Parts Zoning Line eeeeeeeceeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesesneaaeeeeeees 300 Parts Zoning Surface see ee ee ae se hee 302 Parts Zoning Volume acti tat ta aa sca hla tata aan 304 Parts Zoning Translate rasa csedecciecnnsiaicesscncecadnsiid tad Osede catensietebiniad Sedetoces 306 Parts Zoning POAlG pit certo stert conti a ou Souk cue Sas 307 Pals ZONING s SCAlG anann teh kstekenagtee kets 308 Parts Zoning COpy nce eee ee eh eee ee te A ee SA ete 309 Parts Zoning Delete 4a Sins A as a aA as as Man sat ea is 310 Parts Zoning SAVes ccs Rr ndnctesae eh ademensed Munhindlandieelnumitcdatens 311 Parts ZONING RESIONG spite a a a EE E EA 312 Palts Zoning AGING eis sraa araoa a rare aa EENE ariii 313 Parts Zoning FillBlOCK arsin AA 315 Parts Zoning Fill Blockin a 315 Parts Zoning Fill Block Implicit 2 2 2 2 eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee
240. hese additional variables are not available for history plotting The variables must be activated using the Output History Select Part Summary Variables option Select Summary Variables Flinterrupt Refresh i p Save p M HG Energy Results File E Tli M EdfieY Cycles Times N Ewhicz Start cycle 0o M Ex ConFX End cycle J M EntConFY a yb M Ex CouFX Select Part Summary Variables M EwCouFZ M Ext BrdFX Capture image ama Print M ExtBrdFz Log file on Call EXEDIT Field output o 564 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Hourglass energy The 2D and 3D Lagrangian volume and shell elements in AUTODYN use hourglass control to remove zero energy modes of deformation The forces of the hourglass control algorithms dissipate energy in resisting the zero energy modes of deformation In AUTODYN this energy is calculated and accumulated in the element internal energy In version 6 1 the hourglass energy is now also accumulated independently to the internal energy to allow users to interrogate and assess the relevance of hourglass energy in a simulation Contact energy Contact energy is accumulated on a per part basis as i Bryar E Eyan EPEE pe x AX onta In the absence of friction the contact energies of two Par
241. ia Move clipping planes BAX The values below adjust the position of the front and back clipping planes It is not recommended for these values to be changed Front 1 000000 Back p This window lets you set clipping planes for your plot If you zoom in close to or into a grid the image will not look good if you include everything in your view The default values for the clipping planes usually improve such plots considerably but there may be times when you want to use other values Front Use this field to set the distance of the front clipping plane from the viewpoint Any part of the grid nearer to the viewpoint than this plane will not be plotted Back Use this field to set the distance of the back clipping plane from the viewpoint Any part of the grid further away from the viewpoint than this plane will not be plotted 100 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Options Default Settings This dialog lets you to define the default settings for the AUTODYN GUI These settings are stored in an ASCII file autodyn ini and are used to initialize various aspects of the GUI and rendering options each time you start AUTODYN AD Default Settings File location C Documents and Settings cdidev Application Data 4nsys v1 21 QU TODYN
242. ical implicit analysis Note that this feature requires the ANSYS results to be saved to a rst file It is assumed that the same mesh is always used in both the implicit and explicit analyses otherwise results will not be mapped onto the explicit mesh correctly Note that quadratic elements may be used in the implicit model In this case results for the corner nodes and average results for the element will be applied to the explicit mesh The user is advised to check the autodyn log file shortly after starting the AUTODYN analysis as any errors occurring during the implicit results transfer will be echoed to this file Activate Initialization of an explicit analysis under implicit analysis results can be selected using the Activate option under Initialize using ANSYS Mechanical results Initialize using ANSYS Mechanical Results IV Activate Transfer type Displ only 7 Result time 1 000000 Timestep factor 100 000000 The menu shown above is used to configure the transfer of data from the ANSYS Mechanical to the AUTODYN solution and in which manner AUTODYN will be initialized Results File Select the ANSYS rst results file to be used to initialize the AUTODYN analysis Transfer Type Either the Displacement Only or the Material State option as described below Transfer Type options are available to define what analysis results need to be transferred from the ANSYS implicit analysis to initialize the AUTODYN analysis 1 Displac
243. ich in this instance is called two aan thee a aa ak port Sep Deo olslalalstels ich OHO als LO a eE Pwsi Parallel Processing View aie area n is T avoe paba poeng Pust Cahana Hut Ln t Domt nerra m oy Mody Cot vere Decomensmon Sets Setup a_i O a Stowe tae Aayee Newnes eee Aam Uestucturad Parts tees ee po Pel Daath dolore Paradisi Oe Geer we gt rem Press the Set Decomposition button and all Euler FCT parts will be shown in the Automatic Decomposition dialog window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 551 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Input the number of tasks you want to decompose the part over and press the Decompose Now button In this case the number of tasks is two and the following decomposition can be viewed Fe oot sup Becton wm Colon ow Demali Ar SEEE FS Oe Bisel E f Er AARODYNID 6 1 feBate Outono tam Catry Dynamics Psia Emp Take 1 Tasg 2 More complicated decompositions can also be easily achieved Here the part is decomposed over 16 tasks 552 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Siew haw con Olsialalstels BEEBI Ciaj
244. ick access to options also available through the Pull down Menus The main window is composed of a number of Panels View Dialog Message and Command Line 2 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Tool Bar The Tool Bar and the Navigation Bar provides shortcuts to options available in the pull down menus The Tool Bar buttons and their use are described below Create a new model this functionality is only available wnen AUTODYN is started up outside ANSYS Workbench JOpen an existing model this functionality is only available when AUTODYN is started up outside ANSYS Workbench Save current model to current filename this functionality is only available when AUTODYYN is started up outside ANSYS Workbench Open a results file Open a settings file Save current plot view parameters to a settings file Print Transform object default to on Transform light source Rotate model Translate model Zoom function Set view brings up new window so that exact view can be set Reset model X Fit model to view panel B Examine model ke Profile window Toggle wireframe mode on off E Perspective on off Hardware acceleration on off B Setup slide show 3 Create image of current view i Record slideshow A WE Show hide Naviga
245. ics zone Three options are available for calculating the effective zone size used in the timestep calculation By default all models will use a zone size calculation based on element diagonals If the user wishes to obtain improved efficiency especially in 3D simulations the zone size calculation can be switched to one of two alternative options based on either distances between opposing face centers or closest face centers Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual To obtain the optimal time step for HEX solid elements the method of calculating the characteristic zone dimension needs to be set to Opposing Faces option instead of the default Diagonal option Experience to date has shown that these options can significantly improve the efficiency of Lagrange simulations especially in 3D However in certain circumstances when cells become highly distorted instabilities have been observed causing the calculation to terminate with high energy errors The correct choice of erosion strain can reduce these problems It is therefore recommended that users only utilize either of these non default zone_size options if efficiency is critical Automatic Mass Scaling Mass scaling is an artificial numerical mechanism for increasing the CFL Courant Friedrichs Lewy timestep of individua
246. idential information 349 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Boundary Node ka Apply Boundary to Part Apply to Node IJK range for boundary From From J From K Boundary Zerox vel J This window lets you apply a Boundary Condition to a node IJK range for boundary Enter the I J and K index for the node in the fields provided Boundary Select the boundary condition you want to apply from this pull down menu You can define Boundary Conditions by pressing the Boundaries button in the Navigation Bar or you can press next to the pull down menu 350 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Parts Boundary Clear Boundary ia Apply Boundary to Part Clear Boundary Zero x vel x AUTODYN User Manual This window lets you clear a Boundary Condition from the current Part This operation does not delete the definition of the Boundary Condition so you can re apply it later Select the boundary condition you want to clear from the pull down menu and press Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 351 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manu
247. ield Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Times Enter the number of fixed size cells you want to use in this field Position Specify where you want to place the fixed size cells relative to the full I J K range Centered at the center of the full I J range Lower at the lower end of the I J range Upper at the upper end of the I J range e g ten fixed size cells centered e g twelve fixed size cells at the lower end e g eight fixed size cells at the upper end Circle Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 243 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 244 ia Part Wizard Projectile Define Zoning Circle Mesh Type C Typel Type2 Cells across radius nF Imax 5 dmax 5 Nodes 25 Elements 16 Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your circle Type 1 Type 2 The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but about a quarter of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights rese
248. ies and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual List of Hosts The large box lists all the Host machines currently included in this Host Configuration Set You can select a host in this list Add Host Press this button to add a host to this Host Configuration Set the Host Data fields are cleared to let you input data for the new host Delete Press this button to delete the selected host from this Host Configuration Set Host Data Host Name Enter the name of the host machine in this field Number of Tasks Enter the number of tasks to be run on this host If you set the number of tasks equal to the number of CPUs one task will automatically be run on each CPU this is usually the most efficient way to run parallel calculations Executable path Enter the path where the AUTODYN executables are located usually in a shared directory Speed factor If the hosts in your Host Configuration Set have different speeds set the speed factor for each host in this field If all hosts have the same speed set all speed factors to the same value any value is OK Number of CPU Enter the number of CPUs on the host in this field Memory Enter the amount of memory on the host in this field this information is not currently used Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 541 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5
249. ietary and confidential information 225 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 226 a Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Circle Ogive Wedge JE Define Geometry Rhombus Whole Half C Quarter Height X origin Y origin Width Height 0 000000 This predef is a rhombus with its diagonals parallel to the X and Y axes Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Origin Enter the X and Y coordinates for the center of your ogive in the fields provided Width Enter the width of the rhombus Height Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the height of the rhombus Quad kal Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Circle Ogive Wedge Rhombus Define Geometry Guad xi RY vt eldon XoY Y2 x3 Y3 xt Y4 0 000000 X Y X Y 1of3 Coordinates X1 Y1 Enter coordinates of the first point of the quad Coordinates X2 Y2 Enter coordinates of the second point of the quad Coordinates X3 Y3 Enter coordinates of the third point of the quad Coordinates X4 Y4 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights r
250. if the straight line paths are through the explosive material Indirect Path Detonation times are calculated from shortest paths through explosive material Paths are automatically computed around inert materials e g wave shapers Plot detonation points Check this box if you want to see the location of detonation points in the view panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 527 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Point ia Define detonations Define Node 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 Compute Initiation Time Yes No Initiation Time 0 000000 V Limit range of application Range will Include Exclude IJK range From From J From K This window lets you define a detonation point X Y Z Coordinates Enter the X Y Z coordinates of the detonation point in these fields Compute Initiation Time Select whether you want to specify a detonation time or have it computed by AUTODYN If selected AUTODYN will compute the detonation time using paths through the explosive from other detonation points You must specify the initiation time for at least one detonation point plane cylinder or sphere Initiation Time 528 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANS
251. ights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual SET_TSHELL_GENERATE Full Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 79 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Import Nastran Import from Nastran BDF x Import options J Convert Properties to AUTODYN Parts JV Merge duplicate materials I Check shell orientation is consistent Import Options After browsing a NASTRAN input file select import options in this dialog Convert Properties to AUTODYN parts Select this option to name the imported parts from definitions within the NASTRAN file Otherwise generic names are automatically generated for the parts Merge duplicate materials Select this option to merge duplicate materials Check shell orientation is consistent Select this option to check for inconsistent or non manifold shell meshes If the mesh is inconsistent and manifold you should re orient the mesh to have consistent normals Input File Format AUTODYN can import MSC NASTRAN input files in both free and fixed format In free format the entries can appear anywhere on the line and are separated by commas With fixed format a field must be located in a set part of the line The fixed format field can b
252. iginal 0 0 0 Spherical and cylindrical symmetry options are available Angular Velocity 3D only An angular velocity can be specified in addition to translational velocity in AUTODYN 3D The angular velocity is defined in radians time and the axis of rotation is defined through the direction cosines of a vector passing through a point in space 202 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Fill Part Fill Block I Fil with Initial Condition Set Initial Cond Density Int Energy X velocity Y velocity Z velocity Radial Velocity Angular Velocity Angular velocity X Origa Y ovigiri Z ongni Direction Mirnatian V AUTODYN User Manual During the Fill of a Part the angular velocity and spin axis are used to calculate the resultant x y and z velocity at each node These are then added to any specified translational velocities Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 203 AUTODYN User Manual Initial Explicit Model Initialization AUTODYN explicit analysis can be initialized or pre stressed with the results from either a linear static structural non linear static structural or transient dynamic ANSYS Mechan
253. ile independent of the Workbench project using the File Export options in the AUTODYN application Please refer to the Component Systems AUTODYN section of the Workbench On line help for further details on the operations and properties available for an AUTODYN system Explicit Dynamics ANSYS system The Explicit Dynamics ANSYS system is located in the Analysis Systems toolbox of the Workbench GUI This system allows you to completely setup solve and post process an explicit dynamics simulation with the ANSYS Mechanical Workbench user environment At release 12 this user interface fully supports the 3D Finite Element features of ANSYS AUTODYN unstructured Lagrange solvers isotropic inert materials and linear orthotropic materials The system contains a number of unique features for explicit dynamic simulation inside Workbench e Unidirectional and bidirectional links to CAD geometry e Links to Design Modeler Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual e Advanced meshing capabilities tailored for Explicit analysis e Mesh independent loading and boundary conditions e Fully parameterized engineering data geometry initial conditions loads boundary conditions e Automated What If analysis capability e Links to design exploration tools The full capabilitie
254. indow EA ICEM Import Facility Import all parts e Import selected parts Select solver type to be assigned to imported parts f Lagrange C ALE rc Fill Domains The ICEM CFD zoning file contains one or more domains of nodes imported as Parts These are displayed in the scrolling box at the top of the window If Import selected parts is checked you can select one or more domains Import all Parts 74 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this option if you want to import all the domains as Parts Import selected Parts Check this option if you want to import selected domains as Parts Select the domains you want to import in the top box Select solver type Select the solver type you want to assign to the imported Parts Press ov to import the Parts Parts are imported with their domain name You can change these domain names later in the Parts panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 75 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Import LS DYNA Import from LS DYNA x Import options Retain LS DYNA part definitions IV Merge duplicate materials I Check shell orientation
255. information 63 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual A simple sort by the minimum z coordinate of each primitive object While this is well suited for many applications it can result in visual artifacts in complex scenes NNS The Newell and Sancha hidden surface removal algorithm When a possible visual artifact is detected the algorithm first tries to interchange the conflicting primitives If there is still a conflict consider the case of intersecting triangles then one of the primitives is split along the line s of intersection Gamma Correction This pull down menu lets you select how final colors are modified to take account of non linear effects in the printing device or perhaps to match the non linear effects of the same scene displayed on a raster monitor None No gamma correction is performed Color values are assumed to behave linearly Precompute The OutputVPS module modifies all color values gray red green blue before writing the values to the file Thus precomputed gamma correction is applied after precomputed color subdivision but before postcomputed color subdivision This means that postcomputed linear interpolation may not give the expected appearance Precomputed gamma marginally slows file generation but does not affect file size The precomputed gamma factor cannot be changed after the file has been generated Postcompute default Th
256. ing Restore ia Restore Part Zoning Pick part s zoning to restore PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Lagrange 17 41 77 TARGET 2 Lagrange 5 10 TARGETS Lagrange 5 10 s This window lets you restore zoning you have temporarily saved for one or more Parts pressing the Save button in the Parts Zoning panel lets you temporarily save zoning for one or more Parts Select the Parts whose zoning you want to restore and press va 312 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Refine This window lets you refine structured Lagrange ALE Euler Godunov and Euler FCT parts However the part must satisfy the following requirements in order to utilize this new refining facility e The part must be a box type object e The X Y and Z coordinates of the grid nodes must increase with the J and K indices respectively I J K Factor Enter the Refine Factor for the I J K index i e number of the new cells created from an original single cell in that direction The refining algorithms are by default applied to all cells within a part In order to limit the range of cells within a part that undergo refinement the user can select an appropriate IJK RANGE first In addition it should be noted that the following limitations apply to the refin
257. ins Axes Detonation These settings can also be changed by pressing 2 next to the option in the Plots panel The following additional settings can also be changed by pressing 2 next to the option under Additional Components in the Plots panel Eroded Nodes Unused Regions Polygons 2D only Beam sections Shell thickness 110 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Legend Profile Mat direction Marker Shell normals Node Element Part Highlight Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 111 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Display Plot Type Settings Plot type Display bd 1 000000 I Surface rendering for large 3D models Standard shell layer to plot Composite shell layer to plot Background White J Graded shading SPH Particles Points D Anti Aliasing GL only C Circles M Illuminated Points GL only Paint size GL only 5 r Fade Outliers GL only 0 00 4 gt Deformation Magnification Shading Type Flat gt Lighting control This panel lets you set the following general options Deformation Magnification This option lets you view magnified grid deform
258. int before the selected polygon point use shift right mouse button to place the point Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual If you place the inserted point close to a node on the surface of the selected active Part the point will automatically be attached to that node If you immediately follow this by placing a second point close to another surface node of the same selected active Part multiple points will be generated attached to all surface nodes between the two placed nodes in an anti clockwise direction Move Point Use this option to move the selected polygon point to a new location use shift right mouse button to place the point at its new location Delete Point s Use this option to delete one or more polygon points The first point to be deleted is the selected polygon point Use shift right mouse button to select the last point to be deleted All points from the selected point to last point inclusive will be deleted X Y Coordinates These fields display the coordinates of the selected polygon point You can change the location of this point by entering new values in these fields Example Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 497 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliate
259. is highlighted in the graphics window Press the button to accept this selection or continue adding further surfaces with the Alt and left mouse button At any stage the gt button may be used to cancel the process Surface Remove Press this button to choose a surface and remove its nodes faces or elements to the selected Group Select a face using Alt and the left mouse button Any faces that are joined to the selected face and have a normal angle between the two faces of less than a value you specify are then removed from the group For example selecting an element on the side of a cube would remove all faces on that side of the cube By setting the surface angle cut off to a sufficiently large value curved surfaces may also be selected After selecting a face the corresponding surface is highlighted in the graphics window Press the button to accept this selection or continue removing further surfaces with the Alt and left mouse button At any stage the button may be used to cancel the process Surface Angle Cut Off Enter a cut off angle in degrees Only faces with an angle between the normal and a neighbor face s normal of less than this value will be included in a surface selection Apply Boundary to Group Apply Boundary to Group Apply Clear Apply Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 421 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and
260. ise to large hourglass energies and energy errors Shell thickness factor The value of the factor has to be taken between 0 0 and 1 0 and determines the amount of the shell thickness that is taken into account as the interaction distance A factor of 1 0 takes the full shell thickness into account which means that the contact surface is positioned at half the shell thickness on both sides of the shell mid plane A factor of 0 0 means that the shell has no contact thickness and the contact surface is positioned at the shell mid plane Note that for shell node on shell face impacts the node is always located at the mid surface of the shell Initial Penetrations Check 488 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual On clicking this button AUTODYN will search the model for initial penetrations of nodes into surfaces If any penetrating nodes surfaces are found a new Group will be created so that they can be identified displayed using the Groups panel Nodes that initially penetrate surfaces will be missed by the contact algorithm Fix When this option is selected the initially penetrated nodes are set back to the closest contact surface and no initial penetrations are present at the start of the analysis This option is meant for situations where small initial penetra
261. ished 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Plots View range and slices Structured Kd View Range amp Slices Joe Part TARGET Lagrange 17 41 7 View Range Slices Min Max From To Step Bn a ie This dialog window lets you set the view range and slices to be used to display a structured part of your model Part The part that you are defining a view range and slices for is shown here together with its index range View Range This box lets you define the J and K range you want to see for this Part Slices Instead of a solid view of your Part you can request to see only slices planes through the part for any of the three indices Check the box next to an index for which you wish to create slices and define the planes for which you want to see these slices If no boxes are checked a solid plot using the view range will be shown Reset This button resets the View Range and Slices to their default values Apply Pressing this button applies the current settings 108 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual View range and slices SPH Unstructured Set XYZ view range xj M Limit XYZ plot range X min 10 000000 max 20 000000 x Y min 1 010000e 020 Y max 1 010000e 020 Z min 1 010000e 020 FA max 25 000000 Reset range
262. itational components for your model X Y Z acceleration Enter the X Y and Z components of gravity in these fields The gravitational acceleration components will be applied to all Parts present in the model Transport Transport Material velocity 1 000000 timestep saftey factor Euler FCT Operator split ALE Euler Energy Internal pe Euler SLIC Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 581 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual These options relate to the transport of material in various Solvers 582 Material velocity timestep safety factor Enter the timestep safety factor for material velocities In the velocity used to calculate the stability timestep is c u where c is the soundspeed of the material and u is its physical velocity If u is of the order of or greater than c then using c u f can give more stable results where f is the safety factor Euler FCT Select the type of transport algorithm that is used for Euler FCT calculations from this pull down menu The default setting is multi dimensional where all three spatial dimensions are solved simultaneously which is more efficient and helps to maintain symmetric flow fields The alternative is Operator Split where each spatial dimension is solved in turn ALE Euler Energy During a computational Euler cycle mass momentum and ene
263. its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual shaded so as to give the appearance of curved surfaces The intensity for each point is interpolated from the normal of the face vertices Flat shading Gouraud shading Lighting Control The advanced lighting control lets you specify up to 4 different light sources and also to control the direction and form of each light source The following options are available Current light source This allows you to select the current light source to be interactively transformed after selecting the Transform Light button on the toolbar Light source toggles You can choose the number of light sources required up to a maximum of 4 Light source type You can select between directional bi directional spot or point light sources Examples of these are shown in the figure below Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 115 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Directional Light Source Bi Directional Light Source Spot Light Source Point Light Source Show light sources The direction and position of the light sources is shown on screen by white arrows switch the background color to black Examples are shown in the figure below from left to right for bi directional light source spot light source point light source and directiona
264. ive in the fields provided End Radius 288 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the end radius of your ogive in this field Ogive Radius Enter your ogive radius in this field Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your ogive gt Type 2 The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but some of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 289 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Quad 0 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 0 000000 0 000000 fe Automatic J straight Geometric Ratio 1 000000 J Geometric Ratio 1 000000 Coordinates X1 Y1 Enter coordinates of the first point of the quad Coordinates X2 Y2 Enter coordinates of the second point of the quad Coordinates X3 Y3 Enter coordinates of the third point of the quad Coordinates X4 Y4 Enter coordinates of the fourth point of the quad Cells in I J direction 290 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights re
265. l elements that govern the maximum allowed timestep of explicit transient dynamic solutions in AUTODYN Increasing the timestep has the obvious benefit of reducing the number of cycles required to run a simulation to a given point in time Educated use of this option can therefore result in significant improvements in efficiency Damping Options Damping Options Quadratic viscosity 1 000000 Linear viscosity 0 200000 Linear viscosity in Yes v expansion Hourglass damping 10 050000 Static damping 0 000000 These options control the magnitude of damping applied to your problem The default values are best for most problems Be very careful if you increase these values they can significantly change your solution Quadratic viscosity Enter the coefficient of quadratic viscosity you want to apply to shocks compression waves Linear viscosity Enter the coefficient of linear viscosity you want to apply to shocks compression waves Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 577 AUTODYN User Manual Linear viscosity in expansion Choose whether you also want to apply the linear viscosity in expansion Hourglass damping Enter the coefficient of hourglass damping that you want to apply to Lagrangian elements Static damping A static damping constant may be specified whic
266. l light Ambient Diffusive and Specular Light Coefficients The ambient light coefficient controls the amount of background lighting Ambient light is non directional affecting all parts of all surfaces equally 116 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual No lighting Ambient lighting only Diffuse light reflectance controls the proportion of the available non ambient light that the object reflects equally in all directions Non ambient light emanates from the directional and point light sources Specular highlights of a particular color and brightness are created when the direction of incoming light from a directional or point light source is sufficiently close to the viewing direction The specular reflection coefficient determines the brightness of such highlights Diffusive light only Specular light only The specular exponent determines what sufficiently close means The greater the sharpness the smaller more focused the size of the specular highlight Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 117 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual High specular exponent Low specular exponent 118 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All right
267. l rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the radius of the sphere in this field Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your sphere Type 2 The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but some of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 287 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Ogive kal Create Predef Zoning Whole Half C Quarter Solid Hollow origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 000000 Outer End Rad A end 0 000000 Outer Ogive Rad F og 0 000000 Typet Type 2 This window lets you generate an ogive with its axis parallel to the Z axis Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow ogive If you choose a hollow ogive you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the ogive Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of your og
268. later option is more efficient however can lead to instabilities especially in single precision Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 381 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Unstructured Beam n Solver Options Solution type Bending v Timestep safety facto 10 500000 F Volume element reinforcement Solution type The response of a beam element to an applied load includes by default the effects of bending moments This option lets you reduce the beam formulation to that of a truss in which only axial and torsional effects are considered Timestep safety factor Beam elements require a timestep safety factor that is less than the standard global factor defined under Controls Timestep A default value of 0 5 is used and should work for most applications If problems are encountered with the stability of the beam elements reducing this factor down to 0 1 is acceptable Volume element reinforcement This option allows reinforcing bars modeled with beam elements to be tied bonded to the volume of a solid element without the restriction that the nodes of the beams and volume elements initially need to reside at the same physical location The bonded beam nodes are constrained to stay at the same initial parametric location within the volume element during element deformation Ty
269. lative to an origin in XYZ space Origin Input the X Y and Z coordinates of the origin for the scaling Scale Factors Input the X Y and Z scale factors Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 439 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Joins Joins 440 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Define Joins Node to Node Connections Join Join All Union urnan Matrix Review Join tolerance vpn Set Merge joined unstructured nodes Plot joined nodes Plot joined parts F Remove joined faces from plot Select Patt Define Joins im st om Matrix Review 1 VOLUME Bonded Face Connections Plot joi d nodes pitssa hasapettsatoatienesasiteni Select Part 2D Window 3D Window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 441 AUTODYN User Manual This panel lets you join Parts of your model If two Parts are joined AUTODYN automatically finds and joins all coincident nodes in the two parts When unstructured Parts are joined the coinciden
270. ld Number of elements Displayed below the above two input fields is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Grade zoning along length Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 263 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box if you want to grade the zoning along the length of your cylinder you will be asked to specify a starting increment to use 264 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Fill Part 2D ia Part Wizard one TA Fill part v Fill part Initial Cond Material JOCTOL Density wf 11 821000 Int Energy 5 271828e 006 x velocity 0 000000 Y velocity 0 000000 Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 30f3 This window lets you fill the part you are creating Fill Part Check this box if you want the Part Wizard to fill your Part The Part Wizard lets you fill your entire Part with a single material and initial values If you want to fill your part with multiple materials or initial conditions this can be done by pressing the Fill button after completing the Part Wizard Fill with Initial Condition Set Release 1
271. le Half C Quarter Solid i Hollow X origin Y origin Outer radius Ri Rotation degrees Rotation This predef is a circle Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half or Quarter This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow cylinder 222 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual If you choose a hollow cylinder you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the cylinder Origin Enter the X and Y coordinates for the center of your circle in the fields provided Outer Radius Enter the outer radius of your circle Rotation Enter the rotation in degrees of your circle relative to the X axis Ogive a Part Wizard one Select Predef Box Circle ji ive Wedge Rhombus Quad Define Geometry Whole Half f Solid i Hollow origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Outer End Rad R end 0 000000 Outer Ogive Rad F og 0 000000 Principal direction Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 223 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This predef is an ogive with its axes parallel to the X
272. leave the AUTODYN application open but release the license for another application to use While the license is released the AUTODYN user interface will be locked eden Help Interactivity Clipping Planes Default Settings Pause License Create User Subroutine Project After selection of the Pause option the license is released and the AUTODYN user interface will be locked To continue the AUTODYN application the user can select Retry to try to obtain the license again The Close App option will exit the AUTODYN application without saving any data AD Warning This editor is PAUSED because the license is currently in use by another editor in this Workbench session All commands to this editor will be ignored until the license can be obtained For more information on licensing please review the ANSYS Inc Licensing Guide 102 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Options Create User Subroutine Project When AUTODYN version 12 is run for the first time by the logged on user AUTODYN will perform a few additional initialization steps to create user specific settings In previous version you also would have been prompted for a location for user subroutine files which would have been created after the initial step This step is no longer perf
273. lection of connected elements of the same classification e g volume elements shell elements and beam elements A Component is a collection of all connected elements regardless of their topology By default the defined Parts in AUTODYN will not necessarily be equivalent to those defined in the LS DYNA keyword file An option to retain the Part definitions in the LS DYNA file is also available Materials Each element defined in the keyword file will have an associated material definition Corresponding materials will be automatically generated during the import of the keyword file into AUTODYN In general except for the materials identified below the actual material parameters will not be read into AUTODYN and you should ensure that all materials are properly defined after the import At present a subset of the material definitions and parameters are automatically read into AUTODYN These include materials of type rigid elastic piecewise linear plasticity and spring elastic material models Initial and Boundary Conditions Fixed and prescribed boundary conditions are imported from the LS DYNA keyword file into AUTODYN These are converted into the equivalent AUTODYN boundary conditions including parameters where possible Initial velocities defined on nodes and sets of nodes in the keyword file are read into AUTODYN and converted into Initial Conditions The initial condition is also automatically applied to the identified nodes She
274. limit v Time limit Energy fraction s Energy ref cycle Timestep Options Damping Options Solver Options Global Cutoffs SPH Cutoffs Gravity Transport Global Erosion This panel lets you define solution controls for your model Wrapup Criteria These controls are the only ones visible when you open this panel for the first time This is because you must specify some of the parameters all other control inputs have default values that are usually OK Cycle limit 574 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the maximum number of cycles you want your problem to run enter a large integer if you don t want your problem to stop on a cycle limit Time limit Enter the maximum time you want your problem to run enter a large number e g 1 0E20 if you don t want your problem to stop on a time limit Energy fraction Enter the energy fraction you want to use to stop your problem if the energy error gets too large The default value of 0 05 causes you problem to stop if the energy error exceeds 5 Energy reference cycle Enter the cycle at which you want AUTODYN to start checking for an energy error Press alongside any of the remaining options to reveal the input fields for that option Timestep Optio
275. lished 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Joins Join ia Join parts Select part s PROJECTILE TARGET Select part s to join to above list PROJECTILE CAET This window lets you join Parts This method of joining Parts works well no matter how many Parts you have in your model If you only have a few Parts you may prefer to use a Matrix to choose the Parts you want to join Select Part s This box lists all the Parts in your model Select one or more Parts in this list Select Part s to join to the above list This box also lists all the Parts in your model Select one or more Parts in this list Apply 446 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to join all Parts selected in the top window with all Parts selected in the lower window You can apply the above procedure as many times as you wish without exiting this window Every time you press Apply the specified Parts are joined Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 447 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Joins Unjoin ia Unjoin parts Select part s PROJECTILE TARGET Select part s to unjoin from above list PROJ
276. ll Parts that you want to couple to Euler use Polygon coupling Erosion can be used with automatic coupling but not with Polygon coupling If you select Polygon coupling further input dialog is presented 494 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Euler Lagrange Select Euler Lagrange Coupling Type None C Automatic polygon free Polygons Polygons Select polygon Select active part New Delete Velocity Porosity No polygon defined Use New button to create polygon pever No polygon point selected x coordinate Y coordinate Coupling Name Polygon Euler part dd New Delete To set up an Euler Lagrange interaction using Polygons you must first generate one or more Polygons and attach the polygon points to nodes on the surface of the Lagrange Parts that you want to interact with Euler gt lt Then you must specify which Polygons you want to couple with which Euler Parts This dialog lets you generate your Polygons and set up coupling between your Polygons and the Euler Parts in your model Polygons Select Polygon This box lists all the Polygons you have created You can select a Polygon in this list Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserve
277. ll and Beam Sections Shell sections defined in the keyword file are automatically transformed into AUTODYN initial conditions The local direction for layered shells is not currently translated Beam cross sections and directions are read from the keyword file and these and the relevant data are converted to be compatible with beam types used in AUTODYN Keyword Compatibility The current capabilities of the AUTODYN import capability for LS DYNA k keyword files is summarized below Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 77 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual BOUNDARY_SPC_NODE Translational velocities only DORFX DORFY DORFZ not recognized BOUNDARY_SPC_SET Translational velocities only DORFX DORFY DORFZ not recognized INITIAL_ VELOCITY BOXID and IRIGID are not ee esognsed OOS INITIAL_VELOCITY_NODE Translational velocities only VXR VYR and VZR are not INITIAL_ VELOCITY Translational velocities only _GENERATION OMEGA XC YC ZC NX NY GENERATION NZ and PHASE not recognized MAT_PIECEWISE_LINEAR Full pasmem A S NODE PART SECTION BEAM Beam types 1 5 supported QR IRID SCOOR NSM NSLOC NTLOC and IRR are not recognized SECTION SHELL Shell thickness at first node is read in and set a shell thickness in initial condition 78 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All r
278. ll parts of material smaller than an element do not move through the mesh at the correct velocity They tend to stop moving while surrounding material rushes by The Updated SLIC option will transport these small material fractions with statistically the correct velocity This option should be used with care because it can have some undesirable side effects It is possible for these small material fragments to tunnel through other multi material Euler objects like walls or plates and emerge at the other side Global Erosion Global Erosion Erode by geometric strain Erode by timestep Erosion timestep f1 o00000e020 Erode after element failure These options define global erosion criteria for all elements in the model The global erosion options are only available for unstructured elements Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 583 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Controls Mass scaling Mass scaling is an artificial numerical mechanism for increasing the CFL Courant Friedrichs Levy timestep of individual elements that govern the maximum allowed timestep of explicit transient dynamic solutions in AUTODYN Increasing the timestep has the obvious benefit of reducing the number of cycles required to run a simulation to a given point in time Educated use of this option can therefore resul
279. ll rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual User Variables User Variables User Variables MY VAR Rest Yes Rez Yes Tran Yes Add Modify Delete This panel lets you set up grid variables that you can use when programming your own user subroutines User Variable List The top box lists the user variables you have currently defined It shows the name you have assigned to the variable and whether or not the variable is written to restart Save files rezoned and transported in Euler You can select a variable in this list Add Press this button to add a new user variable Modify Press this button to modify the selected user variable Delete Press this button to delete the selected user variable Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 571 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual User Variables Add Modify Add Modify User Variables J x Select user variable vano V Activate User variable name VAR 1 Tl Restart Rezone Remap T Nodal variable Unstructured only This window lets you add a new user variable or modify the selected user variable Select user variable You can define up to 20 user variables Use this pull down menu to select t
280. llowing actions you can type the corresponding Hotkey as an alternative to pressing the a button Button Hotkey Action I lt b Go to the first frame of the animation 44 r Go back one frame p X Play from the current frame 186 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual l Pause at the current frame p This is a toggle button E S Stop at the current frame gt gt a Advance one frame 3 4 Go to the last frame of the animation View Bar lelels This bar only appears when you have loaded a GFA animation The buttons on this bar let you control how you view your GFA animation and work in the same way as the corresponding icons in the AUTODYN Tool Bar ai Rotate view d Translate view A Zoom in or out Set view brings up a window that allows you to set an exact view Reset view to the initial view Turn perspective on or off toggle w zi hY D a Frames Slider This slider lets you move quickly to any frame in the animation s Speed Slider This slider lets you adjust the playback speed for animations Loop Check this box if you want the animation s to automatically start again from the first frame when the last frame is reached Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 187
281. lly intensive it would be beneficial if the scope of its work were limited to this smaller area The Group Contact option allows the user to select a set of face groups to describe the extent of the interactions in unstructured models Select the Specify Group Contacts by Group toggle and press Select to open the Select Groups to include in Contact dialog and use the Add Remove button to specify which face groups are to be included in the contact calculations Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 483 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select Groups to include in Contact During execution any faces eroded will be removed from the group and any new faces uncovered will be added to a group named Uncovered faces Unstructured Beams and SPH can also be included as a node group to participate in contact 484 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Seisi eptees ere t owahe sodiy hehehe pinga of adet feces ow cee Note that Group Contact is additive to Part contact Selecting a Part for contact results in all external faces in the Part being checked for contact Group contact should be used to add additional external faces from Pa
282. luded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range of application IJK range Enter the IJK range you want to use to limit the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 535 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Manual kal Define detonations Ignition Times PROJECTILE IJK range From To l FiomJ 1 To J From K To K Initiation Time 0 000000 Plot contours of variable alpha to view detonation times shown as negative This window lets you manually define initiation times for blocks of elements Part List The top box lists all the Parts in your model Select the Part you want to define initiation time for in this list IJK range Specify the IJK range for a block of elements to which you want to apply an initiation time Initiation time Enter the initiation time that will be applied to all elements in the block in this field 536 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Parallel Parallel Processing IV Activate parallel proce
283. lume and shell elements For shell elements an artificial thickening of the shell parts is used Automatic generation of outside surface Artificial shell thickening for coupling Coupling and Erosion Erosion in combination with Euler Lagrange coupling can be used for automatic coupling in 2D as well as 3D 500 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual When elements that are connected to the coupling surface are eroded the coupling surface automatically will be updated for the new uncovered Lagrangian element faces Ens simulation of erop ring using Euler PEE Sarina and requiring automated update of coupling surfaces during the simulation Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 501 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 2D New Polygon Ka New polygon BAX Enter name of new polygon This window lets you create a new Polygon for Euler Lagrange coupling Enter the name you want to use for your new polygon in the field provided and press Once you have created your Polygon you can add points and attached these points to Lagrange nodes using options in the Dialog panel 502 Release 12 1
284. luminated Points The fade outliers slider gives you the ability to fade in and out of view the sph particles which exist outside of the range set in the contour panel when using the truncate facility this facility is only available when illuminated points are displayed Advanced Image Shading and Lighting Options As set of advanced shading and lighting options are available Piot Type Settings Ol View GRIT ree em Prat type m Plots Fle Sequence Contos Hep Sette o x ALTODYN SD 6 0 BETA fom Century Dynamics r ting Standad ihal layer to piet 2 _ History o Conpiate shed kya bo plot 1 pera Sides Background Whe View Slides Gusded shading Setup Sainct goded background coknar waa Bim Init Cond isi Boundaries Lighting control Careri Light Source v Light Source 1 Light Source 2 light Sours 3 Light Seurce 4 v Show Light Sources Arrtiert Light Contficient 0 A0000 Othe Liga Costficert Speody Light Costioent 0 0000 eocoule Light Emponent Using a combination of the above options metallic looking surfaces can be rendered for example Shading type The shading type can now be selected as either flat or Gouraud For flat shading every point on a face is given the same intensity For Gouraud shading the mesh is 114 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and
285. ly be translated rotated or scaled Fill Press this button to fill a part with materials and initial conditions Geometry Zoning Press this button to define geometric objects for SPH Parts Pack Fill Press this button to pack geometric objects with SPH nodes Boundary Press this button to apply boundary conditions to a Part Gauges Press this button to assign gauges to a part Motions Press this button to assign motion constraints to a structured ALE Part Solver Press this button to select solver options for a Part IJK Range Press this button to modify the IJK range for a structured Part Activation Press this button to set activation deactivation times for a structured Part For unstructured Parts activation deactivation time cannot be set they are always activated Rename Press this button to rename a Part Print 216 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to set print ranges for a Part This option is not available for unstructured Parts Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 217 AUTODYN User Manual New Parts New Create New Part 218 Release 12
286. malGap C Trajectory Interaction Gap Gap size v 10 018018 Calculate Create Check T Include edge on edge impacts Wok Uni Size average Retain inertia of eroded nodes T Prevent erosion of degenerate cells I Erode over penetrated faces V Sel interaction Interaction by Group IV Specify contact surface by group st Interaction Timestep So ee Limiting Velocity 1 010000e 020 Interaction Gap External Gap options The External Gap contact algorithm is implemented for all Lagrange ALE shell beam and unstructured solvers 480 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual A gap is required for the interaction logic The size of this gap must be in the range 1 10 to 1 2 the dimension of the smallest element face of Parts involved in interactions There are two contact algorithms available in 3D External Gap and Trajectory For most models you should set the gap size close to the smallest allowed value 1 10 the dimension of the smallest element face Gap size Enter a value for the Gap size in this field or press Calculate to have AUTODYN set it for you Calculate Press this button to have AUTODYN automatically calculate the Gap size for you The Gap size will be set to 1 10 the dimension of the smallest element face of Parts involved in interactions
287. mber and type of variables depending on the type of element for example a hexahedral element containing an orthotropic material or a triangular shell with a rigid material Each element has three numbering systems for its connecting nodes see figure e A local isoparametric number used to loop over the nodes of an element in the correct order and solved the physical equations Each element with the same topology has the same numbering system e An internal node number the physical properties of each node are referenced via the global node lists A connectivity table is used to cross reference the local node number to an entry in the physical node list e A user node number a number assigned by the user to define the element on YD Uy c i 2011 E gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 E11 gt 121 122 123 124 228 225 226 22 E1000 gt 1000 1011 2011 2000 1020 1021 202t 2020 Example Example Isooarametnc Numbenng Internal Numbering User Numbenng Example Element and Node Numbering For the unstructured solvers in AUTODYN Parts are simply used to allow easy grouping and manipulation of various regions of the model They are not related to the actual data storage for the elements and nodes as in JK based Parts The default definition of a Part currently used for the unstructured solvers is A Part is a list of elements of the same classification volume shell beam that are connected together via the connectivity table of the ele
288. mber of cells elements you want to use in the J and K directions in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Automatic Select this option if you want the internal nodes to be spaced equipotentially IJK Straight Select this option if you want the nodes along each J and K line to be equally spaced along a straight line Geometric Ratios 258 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Input geometric ratios in the fields provided if you want to grade the zoning instead of generating equally spaced nodes Frag Brick ki Part Wizard one Define Zoning Frag mentfBrick Number of elements in each frag brick in x dir Number of elements in each frag brick in y dir Number of elements in each frag brick in 2 dir F Fill mortar with unused max 2 J max 2 K max 3 Nodes 12 Elements 2 Number of elements in each fragment brick Use these fields to set the number of elements per fragment brick in the X Y and Z directions Fill mortar with unused Check this box if you do not want the mortar to be represented as a material If you check this box no elements will be generated for the mortar Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains propri
289. ments Note that within each Part all elements must be of the same class volume shell or beam but not necessarily the topology For example a shell Part may contain a mixture of quadrilateral and triangular elements Nodes are only related to Parts through the element connectivity Nodes can therefore exist in multiple Parts for example if the same node is connected to a beam and shell element Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 213 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual AUTODYN doesn t offer any capability of generating unstructured elements and Parts manual Unstructured elements and Parts can be generated in ANSYS Workbench and transferred to AUTODYN Furthermore unstructured models in MSC Nastran or LS Dyna format can also be imported directly into AUTODYN The following 3D Lagrangian unstructured element types are supported e Volume elements o 8noded hexahedral elements o 6noded pentahedral elements to be used as transition elements o 4noded tetrahedral elements e Shell elements o 4noded quad elements o 3noded tria elements to be used as transition elements e Beam elements o 2noded beam elements The following 2D Lagrangian unstructured element types are supported e Volume elements o 4noded quadrilateral volume elements o 3noded triangular volume elements Note 1 The 2D Lagrangian unstruc
290. ments integrating over 2 or 3 sublayers Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 365 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Solutions Beams ka Solver Solution Options Type of solution Truss Bending Time step safety 5 000000e 001 factor This window lets you set solution options for Beam Parts Type of Solution Select whether you want to compute a truss solution or a solution with full bending moments Time step safety factor Enter the safety factor you want to apply to the time step calculation The default value usually ensures stability of your calculation 366 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Solution 3D Euler FCT E FCT Solution Options Energy Based Velocity Limit f No This window lets you set solution options for 3D Euler FCT Parts Energy Based Velocity Limit Specify whether or not you want to use an energy based velocity limit for Euler FCT computations Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 367 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and af
291. mestep in regions that are not important to your solution Radius cutoff Enter a value for the radius cuttoff for 2D axial models If a Lagrangian node is inside this radius at the start of your calculation it is placed on the axis of symmetry lf a Lagrangian node is outside this radius at the start of your calculation it will not be allowed to come closer than this radius to the axis of symmetry as your calculation proceeds SPH Cutoffs SPH Cutoffs Limit density Delete node Minimum timestep 1 000000e 020 These options let you set SPH cutoffs 580 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The default values are usually good if you are using the default units mm mg ms You may want to change one or more of these defaults if you are using some other set of units Limit density Delete node If the density of an SPH node drops below the minimum density or above the maximum density you have the choice of either limiting the density to the cutoff density or deleting the node Make your choice here Minimum density Enter the minimum cutoff density for SPH nodes Maximum density Enter the maximum cutoff density for SPH nodes Gravity Gravity x accleration 0 000000 Y accleration 0 000000 Z accleration 0 000000 This option lets you set grav
292. n coefficient you want to use Press _se to set the friction coefficient between the two selected Parts Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 469 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual You can apply this procedure as many times as you like to set coefficients between other Parts without exiting the window Define interaction friction coefficients Dynamic friction decay const 0006000 Static Friction coefficient Bse 00i Clear al Dynamic friction coefficient Lum 001 LO This window is available for Trajectory contact and lets you define static and dynamic friction between two Parts Select Part 1 Select the first of the two Parts you want to set the friction coefficient between in this box Select Part 2 Select the second of the two Parts you want to set the friction coefficient between in this box Friction Coefficient A non zero value for the Static Friction coefficient will activate Coulomb type friction between bodies F yR 470 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual A non zero value for the Dynamic Friction coefficient and the Dynamic friction decay constant will activate the use of dynamic friction where an eff
293. n for unstructured Parts is the Transformation option like translation rotation or scaling Plot zoning Standard plotting will only show elements that contain material not unused elements Checking this box shows all elements including unused elements Zoning for IJK range These fields let you specify the IJK range you want zoning operations to act on The default values are for the entire Part Predef Geometries Box Press this button to zone a box Cylinder Press this button to zone a cylinder Sphere Press this button to zone a sphere Ogive Press this button to zone an ogive Frag Bric Press this button to zone a fragment brick wall Transition Press this button to zone a grid transition Import Press this button to import zoning from an external file zon User Press this button to generate zoning from a user subroutine Fill Block Press this button to zone and fill an Euler FCT grid using data from an external file Manual Zoning These options let you build a grid by specifying nodes and generating lines surfaces and 3D volumes 280 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press to reveal the following buttons Node Press this button to define the coordinates of a node Line Press this button to generate coordinates along
294. n only make changes to this in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system Transfer to the AUTODYN model using the update procedure described above e Local co ordinate systems defined and used in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system are transferred through to the AUTODYN application however they cannot be reviewed or modified in AUTODYN e Displacement boundary conditions defined in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system are converted to equivalent velocity boundary conditions in the AUTODYN application e Loading defined in tabular form in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system cannot be edited or reviewed in the AUTODYN application The data is transferred and used in the AUTODYN simulation e Spot weld breaking criteria defined in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system will be converted from a stress to a force criterion Meshing gt AUTODYN v B 1 AD AUTODYN 2 Setu 3 G Analysis A Mesh Autodyn If you only want to transfer a Mesh of complex geometry into AUTODYN then this can be achieved as in release 11 0 using a Mesh system Start by inserting a Mesh system from the Components toolbox e Link directly to CAD Geometry or use DesignModeler to generate geometry directly or adapt CAD geometry for simulation purposes e Mesh the geometry e Create Named Selections To transfer a mesh from the Mesh to the AUTODYN application link the Mesh cell of the Mesh system to the Setup cell of the AUTODYN system Open the AUTODYN Release 12 1
295. n those written with full color information Background Mode This pull down menu lets you select how the background of the scene will be rendered White Force the scene to be rendered on a white background This typically means that the printer does not apply any color or shading to the background Black Force the scene to be rendered on a black background Keep Use the view background color specified in the AVS Express viewer as the PostScript background color Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 61 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Orientation This pull down menu lets you select the page layout Size Landscape The x axis of the scene device coordinates is oriented along the longer side of the paper Portrait he x axis of the scene device coordinates is oriented along the shorter side of the paper This pull down menu lets you select the paper size for the output EPS user Encapsulated PostScript format where you can specify the dimensions of the output and the resulting file can be embedded in other documents You must set the width height and margin in the fields provided if you select this option A letter Standard US letter paper size 280mm x 216mm B Ledger paper size 432mm x 280mm A4 Standard European A4 paper size 297mm x 210mm A3 A3 paper size
296. n y Dynamis mE fe Woet Snp Denn Omio Demasa BERET ZEN iy ELE View aura Bate C Pesia Deromportean If the user wishes to override this decomposition then the Euler FCT part can still be manually assigned as before 554 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Decomposition of beam parts AUTODYN 3D simulations including beam elements can be run in parallel Structured Beams For the parallel computation each structured Beam Part is considered as a single sub domain and can be assigned to a specific task for the parallel simulation Note that individual structured Beam Parts cannot be decomposed into multiple sub domains i One 0 M Tene 0 0001 1000 me Ures an mg aa 100 TNT ORG NUR AREINPORGED WAL Unstructured Beams For parallel computation unstructured Beam Parts can be automatically decomposed similar to all other unstructured Lagrange Parts Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 555 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual J Ovn 0 Teme 0 000 000 me jures an mg as ORO TNT QAAE NEAR A RENFORCID WALL Note that parallel computations including beam elements
297. nc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 419 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to rename an existing Group Delete Press this button to delete a Group Review Press this button to review existing Groups Groups Definition 420 Polygon Add Press this button to interactively define a polygon any nodes faces or elements that lie within the 2D polygon are added to the selected Group Select the polygon points using the Alt key together with the left mouse button To delete the last polygon point use the Shift button together with the left mouse button To complete the polygon use the Control and left mouse button After completing the polygon the selected nodes or faces are displayed Press the button to accept this selection and add to the current Group At any stage the button may be used to cancel the process Note that the Polygon Add option is not available greyed out when you have zoomed into the model using the rubber band option using lt Ctrl gt Left mouse button To be able to use the Polygon Add option you should use the zoom option available from the Tool Bar of AUTODYN Polygon Remove Press this button to interactively define a polygon any nodes faces or elements that lie within the 2D polygon are removed from the selected Group Select the polygon points using the Alt key together wi
298. nditions Boundary Parts Components Groups Joins Interactions Detonation Parallel Controls Output User Variables View Plots Plot Settings History Graphs Slideshow Performance Profiler of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Options Help Interactivity Contents Clipping About Planes Default Settings Pause License Create User Subroutine Project 45 AUTODYN User Manual Import Formatted 46 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual File Pull Down Menu File BB ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN fam Import Setup Execution View Options Hel Open Results File mn ft erme OENE dO nme Version 5 0 0ic Suns cai Version 5 0 02b nee A k Yersion6 0 01c le fk shia Version 11 0 00 Print Export PostScript Export YRML Export Formatted Import Formatted plot type for selected part Close AUTODYN i yy Aill type Additio z compon Materials C Gad gt Vectors This pull down menu lets you perform file operations New Lets you create a new model Open Lets you open load an existing model saved in a binary file Open Results Files Lets you open an existing results file For more details of results files see the section Outputs Results Files Save
299. ned Line thickness Use this slider to vary the thickness of the lines displaying the shell normals Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 155 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Part Highlights When this option is selected Parts selected in the plots panel will be highlighted on the displayed model Selecting multiple parts in the parts list will highlight all the selected Parts E ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN Fle lapot Setup Benevtion View Options Help Bang al S EERE feo als BER eT Jo VOLL suing je ee Hinory OLUME VOLUME C250 ML x Select with lt Alt gt Sates s OATOLAGE N Left mouse button View rae Additional Components Vectots Bondui Jom Detonation tee cal Aves Ged Beam sections 4 Shel thickness Profle Mat direction Mather Shel ecomats Node Elemert J a r r J 5 r r r C r r B r r x UGM bullet impact Using lt alt gt Left Mouse button you may select a part in the model view window and make it the current part The part selected with the mouse will be selected in either the part list in the plots panel or parts panel This is useful to identify parts and to make a particular part the current part active for zoning filling or other part operations 156 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Co
300. nel and choosing Artificial Shell Coupling Thickness in the Shell Thickness Settings panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 511 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Joins Select parts for normals calculation x Select part hullt Included parts HULL 2 for normal calculation Select part s to pult Select part s to pult add remove from HULLH2 add remove from HULLH2 normal composite normal composite calculation calculation Add Add all Remove Remove al To ensure that volumes of joined thickened shells do not overlap as the shells deform the thickening algorithm needs some information on which shell parts should be considered joined when computing the outward normals for shell nodes in the thickening geometry calculations By default all thickened shell parts are set as joined for the coupling calculation If this is not appropriate for example for a T junction between two shell parts you should remove the joins for the coupling calculation It is important to note that these join settings are only used in the coupling calculation and do not affect the structural joins This is illustrated in the figure below On the left the two shell parts are joined for thickening calculations and the resulting thickened shells define a closed
301. nformation of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Mortar included in dimension Check this box if you want the mortar size to be included in the length of each brick fragment Offset ratio Set the offset ratio for the fragments bricks in this field This is how the bricks are staggered along the length of the wall e g if the offset is 0 5 the default the bricks will be staggered halfway across each other as shown in the above figure Fragment brick symmetric about X 0 Check this box if you want the wall to be symmetric about X 0 Enter the required dimensions for your predef and press Next gt to advance to the next dialog window Define Zoning Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 237 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Select Predef 3D Shell This window lets you select the Predef you want to use for the Shell Part you are creating Press one of the two buttons at the top of this window to select your Predef Plane Select Predef Plane Cylinder Define Geometry Plane xY pane C YZ plane Z plane X origin Y origin Z origin Ox oy ree xyz P This predef is a plane perpendicular to the X Y or Z axis Plane Orientation Select the orientation of the plane e g XY plane is a
302. nformation of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Zoning Parts Zoning Pressing the Zoning button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog in the lower region of the panel Plot zoning Zoning for IJK range Fomie fl Tol Plot zoning From J Jem Zoning for IJK range From K To K ils lS Rae Predef Geometries rn Pe tose E Predef Geometries Box Cylinder Sphere Ogive Box Circle Ogive wedge Hex FragrBrie Transon Import Rhombus Quad Transon Import User E Bock i IT Manual Zoning Manual Zoning Node Line Sutace Volume Node Line Suas Volume Transformations Transformations Translate Rotate Scale Translate Rotate Scale Operations Operations Copy Delete Save Restore Copy Delete Save Restore Refine Refine 2D Structured 3D Structured F Plot zoning Predef Geometries Manual Zoning Transformations Operations 2D amp 3D Unstructured This dialog lets you define the zoning grid coordinates for the selected Part Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 279 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual For 2D amp 3D unstructured Parts the geometry and meshing cannot be defined The only optio
303. ng as a fixed size Length Scale Factor Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 145 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The Length Scale Factor is only used together with the scale option If a length scale factor of one is chosen each spring will be displayed as the same length as the element Fixed Length If the fixed length option has been selected specify the length of each plotted spring in this field Radius to Length Ratio Set the radius to length ratio of each plotted spring in this field Number of revolutions Set the number of revolutions for each plotted spring in this field Resolution Set the number of lines used to represent each plotted spring in this field Damper Plot Settings Select the Plot Damper toggle to enable the damper plot 146 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Y b3d2p2 Cycle 0 Time 0 000E 000 pe Units om g ye LARGE LAGRANGE BENCHMARK TEST Scale Select this option to normalize each plotted damper with the length of the damper element Fixed Length Select this option to display each plotted damper as a fixed size Length Scale Factor The Length Scale Factor is only used together with t
304. ngle or multiple Jobs calculations in batch mode without graphics Job List This box lists all current jobs Save files to be loaded and executed and shows their status Add Job Press this button to add a job to the list A window opens to let you browse to the Save file you want to load and execute Delete Selected Job s Select one or more Jobs in the Job List and press this button to delete them from the Job List Load Job s from File 90 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to load jobs saved in a file bat into the Job List Save Job List to File Press this button to save all the jobs in the current Job List to a file bat Run Press this button to run the jobs in your Job List E AUTODYN Batch Runner D proectile penetration files doQ ATD aimouimpact4 Oad Runnin D AdvancedMateriaModeling Detonation detonation indrect muki_0 ad Waiting D AdvancedMateriaModeling Detonation detonation induect_O ad Waking D projectile penetration_files dp0 ATD aemourimpact4_0 ad Running CYCLE 9 Time 1 654E 04 Timestep 2 292 05 controlled by unstructured element 10888 in Part WBbody 17 Jobs run sequentially in the Job List While running the window displays information on which jobs have completed which job is curr
305. ngth scale KI jo Line thickness IV Show Direction 1 M Show Direction 2 IV Show Direction 3 Material direction vectors wil only be plotted for orthotropic materials This window lets you change settings for plotting material directions Material direction length scale Use this slider to vary the length of the lines displaying the local axes Fix length scale Check this box to fix the local axes length scale Line thickness Use this slider to vary the thickness of the lines displaying the local axes Show Direction 1 150 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box to display the local axis for direction 1 Show Direction 2 Check this box to display the local axis for direction 2 Show Direction 3 Check this box to display the local axis for direction 3 For large models containing mainly volume elements you will get better results by selecting the Settings Display Surface rendering option ALSTOOYN 3D 4 0 trom Century Dynamics Material Locaton er AA A eet yy yt NIN Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 151 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Marker Marker Plot Settings X Marker
306. ns Timestep Options Safety factor Method of characteristic zone dimension Frequency cycles Min timestep Max elem scaling Max part scaling These options control the timestep AUTODYN uses to run your problem Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 575 AUTODYN User Manual 576 Start time Enter the start time for your problem Minimum timestep Enter the minimum timestep you want to use If the timestep drops below this value your problem will be terminated If you leave this field zero the minimum timestep will be set to 1 10 of the Initial timestep Maximum timestep Enter the maximum timestep you want to use AUTODYN will use the minimum of this value or the computed stability timestep Initial timestep Enter the initial timestep you want to use If you leave this field zero the initial timestep will be set to 1 2 the computed stability timestep Safety factor It is not wise to run problem at the stability limit so a safety factor is applied to the computed stability timestep Enter the stability factor you want to use The default value 0 6666 is good for all problems but you may want to increase this value to 0 9 in some cases to use a larger timestep 0 9 is a good value for most Lagrangian calculations Method of calculating characterist
307. nt in the copy of the Component Enter your name for the new Component and press za Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 415 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Groups Introduction The Group option allows the user to group an arbitrary independent of Part and Component selection of nodes faces or elements on which operations can subsequently be performed An interactive method of selecting groups of nodes faces or elements is available The selection is made by drawing a 2D polygon on the screen around the region of interest as shown in the figure below E ANSYS AUTODYN Fle ispat Setup Execution Wew Options Help SARIS a BE EL Jel lols ol Tele felte ELE Wal Gee AUTOOYN D vt irom ANSYS T Suutiace tendering tr wga D mee Pra Groups Mates eng J ElGrovps Definition Crate polygon to select nodes lacas cAN gt Left Mouse Add polygon point lt ShilteLeft Mouse Delete polygon point _ lt ContsolLelt Moura gt Complete polygon Lx Sulat angle cuol bend A i y ElApply Boundary to Group ceed Time 0 000E 000 ys Fil Element Group Lise om 4 98 OBLIQUE IMPACT OF STEEL ON T ElTransiorm Group Zoning Group Operations 416 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of
308. nt material library Save Press this button to save the materials you have defined to a material library Current material library This box displays the current material library you have selected Update Library Press this button to update old material library files so that they can be used with this version of AUTODYN Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 189 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials New Modify Material Data Input STEEL Nane pe p ewcediy V oe E0S Bulk Modulus Reference Temperature Specific Heat Thermal Conductivity 4 Strength Failure Erosion Cutoffs Material Reference This window lets you define or modify the model components and parameters used for a material 190 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Name Enter a name for your material in this field Reference Density Enter the reference density usually the initial density for your material in this field EOS This option lets you define the Equation of State you want to use for your material Press next to this option to expand the dialog Select the Equation of State you want to use from the pull do
309. nt to include any number can be selected Contour Variable This button is only active if a Contour Fill type is selected Press this button to change the variable to be contoured View Range This button is only active if a single Part is selected Press this button to limit the IJK range that is plotted for the Part Mirror Check a box to mirror the image in the associated axis 2 All Fill types and Additional components have default Settings You can quickly access and change these settings by pressing the 2 button to the right of these options Doing so will bring up a dialog window containing the settings available for the associated option The Settings button on the Navigation bar gives you access to all these settings 106 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Plots Select Contour Variable ia Select Contour Variable Joey Material This dialog lets you select the variable you want to contour Select the variable from the left hand list For multi material variables those at the top of the left hand list you must also select a material or All from the right hand list Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 107 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Publ
310. ntains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Selected Part Settings M Select Patt Highlight On Selected Part Color Dial Mode M HSV f RGB Red Green 0 80 0 75 The default highlight color is golden yellow you may alter the color and opacity of the highlight color that is applied to selected parts using the associated options panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 157 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History History E ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN Fle Inport Setup Execution Wew Options Help Elua g BE LELLE ek Lek Sel eL ew E History Plots EI AUTOON v12 0 trom ANSYS Gauge History Ident 0 ben3d1 ng 3 2 Q Q 2 w 2 x This panel lets you compose and display time histories of Gauge points and Summary variables When you select this panel the history and summary data associated with the model you are working with will be automatically loaded and the model s Ident will be displayed in the window at the top of the panel Load Press this button to load history data for other models Remove 158 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published
311. ntains proprietary and confidential information 425 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ow z ow a yee yee Tore 0 OEO re L Tor 0 OEO re Le Unt em ng mt han g m Single part with normals differently directed Thickened shell provides incorrect coupling surface a z on z Cycle 0 Cycle 0 Tre 0 OEKO m Tere 0 OEO me k Unt 9 a a g Create element group in AUTODYN Reverse Thickened shell provides correct coupling normals surface 426 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Groups New New Group or Select group type Nodes C Faces C Elements This window lets you create a Group Group Name Enter the Group name in this field Group Type Select either a node face or element Group type AUTODYN User Manual Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 427 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Groups Rename Rename Group This window lets you rename an existing Group Group Name Enter the new Group name in this field 428 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates
312. nto a single Part This simplifies the model and can also improve performance because there will be fewer Joins in the model For some applications you may not wish to merge the IJK Parts in this way De selecting this option will result in no change in the Parts defined in the model Merge joined IJK nodes into single unstructured node By default all joined nodes are merged into a single unstructured node during the conversion process In some cases for example if you have pinned joins you may not wish to do this Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 83 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Setup Pull down Menu Setup Setup Execution Vie Description Symmetry Material Initial Conditions Boundary Parts Components Groups Joins Interactions Detonation Parallel Controls Output User Variables This pull down menu lets you set up models Most of these options are accessible through the Navigation Bar Description Lets you modify the description of your model Symmetry Lets you change the symmetry settings for your problem Material Lets you define and modify materials Initial Conditions Lets you define and modify Initial Condition Sets Boundary Lets you define and modify Boundary Conditions Parts 84 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains propri
313. o ensure that the resulting position of the nodes and faces does not result in further penetration at that point in time The decomposition response algorithm is more impulsive in a given computational cycle than the penalty method This can give rise to large hourglass energies and energy errors Retain inertia of eroded nodes Check this box if you want to retain the inertial of eroded nodes otherwise eroded nodes are removed from the model Interaction by Part Add Press this button to set interactions between Parts Add All Press this button to set all Parts to interact with each other Remove Press this button to remove interactions between Parts Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 477 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Remove All Press this button to remove all interactions between Parts Matrix Press this button to set interactions using a Part matrix Friction Press this button to define static and dynamic friction between different Parts Review Press this button to review all your interaction settings User defined friction Aside from the friction definition through the Interaction by Part method described above there is also a user defined friction option available through the use of a user subroutine called EXFRICTION2D Interaction by Part Add Add All Remove Remove al M
314. ock in index space of the current structured Part For an unstructured Part the boundary condition will be applied to all nodes elements or faces of a Part IJK range for boundary Enter the IJK range of the block in the fields provided Boundary Select the boundary condition you want to apply from this pull down menu You can define Boundary Conditions by pressing the Boundaries button in the Navigation Bar or you can press next to the pull down menu 348 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Boundary I J K Plane ka Apply Boundary to Part Apply to Plane IJK range for boundary From Bailie From J To J From kK fi To K Boundary This window lets you apply a Boundary Condition to a l J or K plane of the current sane shown is for applying a Boundary Condition to a plane input for the other planes is similar IJK range for boundary Enter the plane and the J and K range in the fields provided Boundary Select the boundary condition you want to apply from this pull down menu You can define Boundary Conditions by pressing the Boundaries button in the Navigation Bar or you can press next to the pull down menu Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and conf
315. ode Element Node Elernent irik Phot labels for SPH IV Plot labels for groups elemi 705 Elements nodes 1458 Nodes This window lets you change settings for plotting node element numbers Plot type Choose to plot numbers for nodes or elements Node Element limit The maximum number of node or element numbers to be plotted For larger models this number may be increased which can result in a slower graphic refresh Plot labels for group Select this option to plot node or element numbers for a particular group If this option is not selected node element numbers are shown for all plotted parts Group list If the Plot labels for group Plot labels for SPH Select this option to include SPH particles in the node or element plot 122 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials Settings Materials Plot Type Settings Piot type Materials I Smooth mult materials Material visibility M Void VV Steel4340 lV water Fragment plot Output fragment analysis f Cracked plot Opacity 1 00 4 l This panel lets you set the following options for material plots Grid lines These options let you view grids with or without grid lines or with just the outline of the grids displayed and the color in which the grid lines or outline are
316. of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This box also lists all Parts involved in interactions Select one or more Parts in this list Press to set all Parts selected in the top window to interact with all Parts selected in the lower window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 463 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Remove Remove Interaction This window lets you remove interactions between one or more Parts This method of removing interactions works well no matter how many Parts you have in your model If you only have a few Parts you may prefer to use a Matrix to add or remove interactions Select Part s This box lists all Parts involved in interactions Select one or more Parts in this list Select Part s to interact with the above list 464 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This box also lists all Parts involved in interactions Select one or more Parts in this list Press to remove interaction between all Parts selected in the top window and all Parts selected in the lower window Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc
317. of part Range Il 11 41 J 6 26 K 1 41 The results stored in file BLKRP1 are then remapped into the refined grid to give the initial conditions for the second phase of the analysis as shown below in figure a The propagation of the blast wave can then continue until again the wave front approaches the boundaries of the refined region as shown in figure b At this stage a further block remap data file is written named BLKRP2 a b a initial blast remap from BLKRP1 b blast wave approaches boundary of refined region Expansion of blast in large refined region The final stage of the analysis can be performed using the full model This model is reloaded and the results stored in file BLKRP2 are remapped into the entire Euler FCT part to give the initial conditions for the final phase of the analysis as shown below in figure a The propagation of the blast wave can then be tracked though the remainder of the city centre as shown in figure b Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 345 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 AUTODYN User Manual a b a second blast remap from BLKRP2 b blast wave propagates through city centre Expansion of blast in full Euler FCT part 346 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries
318. of the parts menu Select Object s BIRD General 516 sph nodes Casing Full cylinde 0 sph nodes Projectile Half sphere 0 sph nodes Create Modify Predef Objects New Modify Copy Delete Import Objects Part Transformations Tralate Rotate This panel allows you to define the geometry for SPH objects Select Object s All defined SPH objects are shown in the Select Object s list Select a single object to Modify Copy or Delete or select one or more objects to Transform Create Modify Predef Objects New Press this button to define a new SPH object Modify Press this button to modify an existing SPH object This button is only active if a single SPH object is selected You cannot modify objects created by conversion from a part using the import objects part button Copy Press this button to create a copy of the selected SPH object This button is only active is a single SPH object is selected Delete Press this button to delete the selected SPH object This button is only active if a single SPH object is selected Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 389 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Import Objects Part Press this button to covert an existing part structured or unstructured into an SPH object This operation is useful for creating complex SPH obje
319. of the smoothing length you want to use for SPH calculations The value you enter here can significantly affect the efficiency of SPH calculations Buffer Zone Size Enter the buffer zone size as a multiple of the smoothing length you want to use for SPH calculations The value you enter here can significantly affect the efficiency of SPH calculations Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 371 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Dezone 2D amp 3D Euler Dezone Part This window lets you dezone a 2D or 3D Euler Ideal gas or Euler Multi material Part Dezoning involves combining a number of cells in a fine grid into single cells of a courser grid l factor Enter the number of cells in the direction you want to combine into a single cell This total number of cells in the direction IMAX 1 must be exactly divisible by this number J factor Enter the number of cells in the J direction you want to combine into a single cell This total number of cells in the J direction JMAX 1 must be exactly divisible by this number Update grid size Select Yes if you want the lJ index range of the Part to be reduced automatically to reflect the dezone If you select No the index range will remain unchanged with the higher indexed cells becoming unused K factor
320. ometry or mesh Linking different systems If the mesh geometry of the application to be solved in AUTODYN cannot be made with the simple model building tools available in the AUTODYN application we recommend the following approaches to build the AUTODYN model ANSYS Explicit Dynamics gt AUTODYN Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 39 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual EE i eM Explicit Dynamics ANSYS AD AUTODYN 2 Engineering Data Vy 2 seu F 3 GD Geometry 7 3 Analysis amp 4 Model v AUTODYN 5 7 7 Resuts A Explicit Dynamics ANSYS The recommended approach for bringing Lagrangian FE based models with complex geometries into AUTODYN is to start off with an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system e Define material data using the Engineering Data application e Link directly to CAD Geometry or use DesignModeler to generate geometry directly or adapt CAD geometry for simulation purposes e Mesh the geometry and define connections Contact Joins Spotwelds Optionally e Assign initial velocities to components e Apply loads and constraints directly to the geometry e Define solution controls and outputs e Solve and Post process results To transfer the model from an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system to the AUTODYN application link the Setup cell of the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system
321. on 417 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual E ANSYS AUTODYN Fle ispat Setup Execution Wew Oore Hep OEeEPEEG BR EERE es EPA ELE View lw Groups a pa Once a group is defined a number of operations can be performed depending on the type of group Groups 418 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Target 600 Elements Projectile 516 Nodes J Surface rendering for large 3D models IV Plot Groups Groups Definition New Rename Copy Delete Polygon Add Polygon Remove Surface Add Surface Remove Select options above to create modify or delete groups of nodes faces or cells Surface angle cut off 30 000000 Apply Boundary to Group Fill Element Group Transform Group Zoning Group Operations A Group is a selection of nodes faces or elements to which you can perform operations such as applying boundaries filling This panel lets you define Groups and use them to perform various operations Group List The top box displays a list of the Groups you have defined together with their type node face or element and the group size You can select a Group in this list New Press this button to create a new Group Rename Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP I
322. onfidential information 21 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview File names AUTODYYN file names have the underlying format of Name_information extension Examples A cycle zero Save file would be named myfilename_0 ad The Save file for cycle 12500 would be named myfilename_12500 ad 22 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview On Line help The documentation and help pages for AUTODYN have been merged into a single context sensitive HTML documentation system All documents are accessible from the AUTODYN graphics user interface Pressing Help bring up context sensitive help pages in your default web browser Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 23 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Supported Operating Systems and Compilers The following operating systems are supported at release 12 0 of ANSYS AUTODYN System C Fortran Windows XP Pro 32 Microsoft Visual Intel Fortran bit Studio 10 1 Windows Vista 32 bit C NET 2005 Windows XP Pro Microsoft Visual Intel Fortran 64bit Studio 10 1 Windows Vista 64bit C NET 2005 RedHat
323. ormed and the generation of the user subroutine project is now available as a user action from within AUTODYN from the Options Menu instead Options interactivity AUTODYN initialisation Clipping Planes Default Settings Please select a location for AUTOOYN user su Pause License rE Create User Subroutine Proj Browse for Folder Select example data directory My Documents aa_fies O AQWAData AUTODYN data E AUTODYN sampl Rae AUTODYN user G3 My Data Sources O My eBooks 3 My Google Gady My Music My Pictures W Mu OSOA Fidler Lae After selection of the location for the user subroutines AUTODYN will install the user subroutine project in a sub directory with name AUTODYN user_subroutines Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 103 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Help AD ANSYS AUTODYN AUTODYN File Import Setup Execution View Options Mas Ens eis Plots m Select Pats v Cycle no name v PEdJs This pull down menu provides general help for AUTODYN Contents and provides information about the current version About 104 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN
324. ory of a node and a face intersects during the cycle a contact even is detected 458 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Xit tytat amp Contact Event x X t tgtodt F Ilo i Vi X tetet gt At O 0 If a contact event is detected the node involved in the contact will be pushed back towards the true contact position during the computational cycle There are two methods available 1 Penalty If a contact event is detected a local penalty force is calculated to push the node back to the face Equal and opposite forces are calculated on the nodes of the face in order to conserve linear and angular momentum The applied penalty force will push the node back towards the true contact position during the cycle However it will take several cycles to satisfy the contact condition Kinetic energy is not necessarily conserved The conservation of energy can be tracked using the energy time history 2 Decomposition Response DCR All contacts that take place at the same point in time are first detected The response of the system to these contact events is then calculated to conserve momentum and energy During this process forces are calculated to ensure that the resulting position of the nodes and faces does not result in further penetration at that
325. otate Rotation angle 0 000000 Axis of Rotation x axis K D sa This window lets you rotate all Parts of the selected Component about an axis in XYZ space Rotation Input the rotation angle in degrees X Y Z axis Use this pull down menu to specify the axis about which the Component will be rotated Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 413 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Scale ia Component Scalin g x origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 000000 x scale factor 000000 Y scale factor 2 000000 2 scale factor 2 000000 This window lets you scale all Parts of the selected Component in XYZ space Origin Input the X Y and Z coordinates of the origin for the scaling Scale Factors Input the X Y and Z scale factors 414 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Copy ka Copy Component Joe New component name Oo o This window lets you copy the selected Component to a new Component During the copy operation a new copy of each structured part in the Component is generated Unstructured Parts cannot be copied and therefore will not be prese
326. ou see its alias if defined followed by its full path name in parentheses Double clicking on any folder in this list selects it as the directory for your current model a Select Create Folder Press this button to add another folder to your list using a browser After selecting the directory for the folder you can optionally specify an alias for the folder K 3 Remove Folder from list Press this button to remove the selected folder from your list View Folder Contents Press this button to view the model files in the selected folder Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 53 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Manage Folders New Folder Kd New Folder Selected Folder Optional Folder Alias This window lets you define an optional alias name for a folder Enter the alias name in the field provided If you leave this field blank the full folder name will be used to reference the folder 54 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu File Save As This menu is only available when AUTODYN is started outside Workbench Kd Save Model As Browse Folder List Save cycle 0 This windo
327. oup Operation Split Nodes Use this option to split nodes across material boundaries within a selected group AUTODYN will search through all elements in the selected group and identify nodes that are connected to elements through the connectivity table with different materials Each node connected to more than one material will be replicated by the number of connected materials while retaining the same physical location The connectivity of each associated element will be updated The option is useful for generating a sliding interface between two materials and enforcing a conforming mesh coincident nodes between the material interface at the start of the simulation Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 423 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual H p gt Ce Caig ale e He Kem SOS e TE ORNE Se SERGE RRA TO RT wae yt EDRU TERRA RQST ae ne jom Que Arein Coe ews s om IN jem py Bie tents ie phia Bhir Get Gilets Gite e ow A F eis oe ome e gt m tar JUS rere 4 ee Sipas uncer len LP A E tee rene phen M Sm renee m Form Multi body Part in Design Modeler Generate Conformal Mesh in Meshing with single node at material interface Opos rey me boot Sia beua iee Cote rem EEM GE CER AE Cer BEL EEE BY CEEATIS AE CEA BERE E a Sabot noone steve te orasta dere ga
328. ow Press this button to assign the specified block to the specified Task Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 547 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This procedure can be repeated as many times as you want to assign blocks of Sub domains to Tasks 548 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Automatic Decomposition Automatic Decomposition x Parts to be decomposed Start Task Number of Tasks Decompose Now Parts to be decomposed Select the parts to be decomposed from the list of unstructured parts by default all unstructured parts will be selected Start Task Enter the start task Number of tasks Enter the number of tasks Decompose now Press the Decompose Now button to automatically define the task on which each of the elements contained in the selected Parts will be assigned Examples Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 549 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Single unstructured Part e Select Part e Start Task 1 e Number Tasks 8 All Parts Unstructure
329. ows the name of the current Host Configuration Set The pull down menu for this box lets you change the current Host Configuration Set to any other Set you have defined Add Press this button to define a new Host Configuration Set Modify Press this button to modify the current Host Configuration Set Copy Press this button to copy an existing Host Configuration Set to a new Host Configuration Set Delete Press this button to delete the current Host Configuration Set Decomposition Sets This input lets you define the domain decompositions you want to use for parallel processing by defining one or more Decomposition Sets Unlike Host Configuration Sets Decomposition Sets are specific to your model The box at the top shows the name of the current Host Decomposition Set The pull down menu for this box lets you change the current Decomposition Set to any other Set you have defined Add Press this button to define a new Decomposition Set Enter the name of your new Decomposition Set in the Selected decomposition field Delete Press this button to delete the current Decomposition Set Subdomains 538 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press this button to decompose the Parts of your model into sub domains SPH parts are decomposed automatically Task As
330. ox at the top of this dialog contains a list of the animations currently included in the sequence together with their time delay how long the first slide in the sequence is shown in seconds Insert Press this button to insert another animation immediately after the selected animation Delete Press this button to delete the selected animation Delay Enter a time delay in this field in seconds When you Insert an animation this time delay is applied You can create and edit sequence files manually if you wish Sequence files must have a seq extension and use the following format Format Example The number of animations 3 in the sequence Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 185 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 0 0 anim gif Default frame delay in seconds lt space gt file 1 2 name another gif Default frame delay in 1 6 seconds lt space gt file yetanother gif name Default frame delay in seconds lt space gt file name etc Save As This option saves the current sequence file seq Control File Sequence S This pull down menu provides the same functions that are available in the Control Bar Control Bar l4f44i gt gt fl This bar lets you control the playing of the GIF or GFA animation you have loaded Pressing a button on this bar performs the fo
331. pen Results File Save Save As Save As Version gt Manage Folders Save settings Load settings Print Export PostSeript Export VRML Save Formatted Open Formatted Exit Once a results file has been selected various options within AUTODYN will be inactive since no model alteration is possible The cycle drop down menu from the Plots panel is automatically updated to represent the cycles of results files that can be loaded In order to switch back to full restart files simply load in a restart cycle file The adres directory is designed to be independent of any other files in order to share the results with colleagues simply transfer the directory Post processing using results files is significantly more memory efficient than from a restart file Using results files AUTODYN only loads the data required to generate the requested Plots The efficiency improvement will be problem dependant however a 2 to 3 times increase in the size of model that can be post processed on a 32 bit Windows system can be expected To use the results files to create an animation of the simulation select the option Scan for results files from this ident from the Generate Multiple Slides panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 569 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 570 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc A
332. pi of rode laces o ch wo i a he ie Dada he ha ba Create Element Group in AUTODYN Nodes are duplicated at material interface to Split nodes across material interface allow sliding contact Example use of Split nodes to create conformal sliding interface Merge Nodes 424 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Use this option to merge coincident joined unstructured nodes into a single unstructured node This option is similar to using the Merged joined nodes option on the Join panel with this option only the nodes that are part of the node group will be merged This option will increase the robustness in many applications involving joins atot W boot a bean te Cow rey Baze pE 3 CEGE PE F BLE mele EENIG sia aonan fel F Biel E Ea ee T Ta Eai co Famn Create Node Group in AUTODYN Duplicate nodes are merged into single nodes Merge duplicate nodes Example use of Merge nodes to remove joins Reverse Shell Normals Use this option to reverse the shell element normal of a selected group of shell elements This option has to be used when not all element normals of a shell part point in the same direction and Euler Lagrange coupling is used with thickened shells Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Co
333. pical applications involve reinforced concrete or reinforced rubber structures like tires and hoses At start up AUTODYN will determine the parametric positions of all nodes of beam Parts selected as reinforcement Parts Solver within volume elements hex tet penta in the model The nodes are tied to the parametric co ordinate of the volume element until the element erodes 382 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual On erosion of the volume element the beam node bonding constraint is removed and becomes a free beam node Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 383 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Motions Parts Motions Pressing the Motions button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog in the lower region of the panel for structured Parts Apply ALE Motions Block Plane J Plane K Piere Node ALE Settings Modify Select motion for plotting Free Lagrange Fixed Euler Equal Spacing Equal Spacing Y Equal Spacing Z Equal Spacing Equal Spacing J Equal Spacing l K This dialog lets you apply motion constraints to an ALE Part Block Press this button to apply motion constraint
334. pping planes for your plot Default Settings Lets you change the default settings used to start up AUTODYN Pause License Lets you temporarily pause the license and free it for another AUTODYN instance Create User Subroutine Project Lets you install the AUTODYN project to create your own version of AUTODYN by using user subroutines 98 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Options Interactivity Ml Mouse Interactivity lol x Select keyboard mouse button combination for Rotate None Middle mouse butte Translate Control Middle mouse butte 7 Zoom None Right mouse buttor Box zoom Control Right mouse buttor Part Select a E Left mouse button Y Toolbar None zj Left mouse button gt NOTE The interactivity mode of the toolbar keyboard mouse combination is set by the rotate translate zoom buttons on the toolbar This window lets you change how the mouse and keyboard is used for the Tool Bar operations that manipulate images in the view panel Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 99 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Options Clipping Planes
335. proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Open Formatted Lets you open load an existing model saved in a formatted ascii file Import Formatted Lets you open load an existing model saved in a formatted ascii file Close AUTODYN Lets you exit AUTODYN Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 49 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu File New This menu is only available when AUTODYN is started outside Workbench Ident Heading Description Symmetry Units This window lets you start the creation of a new model Folder This box shows you the folder where files for the model will be kept Press the Browse button to select a different folder Press the Folder List button to select a folder from your current list of folders or manage your folder list Ident Enter an Ident for your model in this field The ident you choose is used to identify all the files created for your model e g If your Ident is MylmpactProblem then the cycles zero Save file for the problem will be named MylmpactProblem_0 ad 50 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009
336. purposes two nodes need to reside at the same physical location The nodes that are to be bonded to a face may have an offset with respect to the face and the offset is a user defined maximum physical normal distance of a node from a face which can be bonded together Bonded face connections can fail and break upon a user defined stress criterion Spot Welds Spot welds generated in an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics systems are transferred to the AUTODYN system as beam elements filled with a rigid material Spot welds utilise the multi body rigid material option where each spot weld acts as an individual rigid boy Spot welds can be defined as breakable by force e Normal force limit maximum normal force that can be sustained by the weld e Shear force limit maximum shear force that can be sustained by the weld Failure of the spot weld occurs when er b 5 where f and f are normal and shear interface forces S and S are the maximum allowed normal and shear force limits and expn and exps are user defined exponential coefficients The normal interface force f is nonzero for tensile values only Note that spot welds cannot be generated directly inside an AUTODYN system Spot welds should be defined in an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system and automatically transferred to a linked AYTODYN system For each spot weld connections a multiple beam rigid body is automatically generated for each spot weld in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system in order to
337. r Speed Slider Control Bar View Window This is where your animations are shown Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 183 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menus 184 File e Sequence Controls pen GIF Open GFA Exit This pull down menu lets you load single GIF and GFA animation files for playback and exit the program Sequence File Sequence Controls ew Sequence File Open Sequence File This pull down menu lets you playback multiple GIF animations using sequence files A sequence file contains a list of GIF animations you want to view consecutively All the animations in a sequence file must be in the same directory as the sequence file New Sequence File This option opens a new sequence file Open Sequence File This option opens an existing sequence file Edit Sequence This option lets you insert and delete animations in the current sequence file The following dialog window appears when you select this option Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual lt START gt 0 0 BUMPER GIF 5 0 CRUSH GIF 5 0 CERAMI GIF Delay s Delete Insert 4 5 00 Sequence list The b
338. r are selected some degradation in runtime performance can also be expected Press alongside any of the remaining output options to reveal the input fields for that option Review Variables Select this button to create an html page of structured or unstructured variables After selection of the Review button first a selection window appears where the type of variable for review needs to be selected e g 2D or 3D structured or unstructured Select variables to review Review 2D structured variables C Review 30 structured variables Review all unstructured variables Review integer unstructured variables C Review real unstructured variables C Review used unstructured variables An html page will be created that shows a list of requested variables and their description 560 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ANSYS AUTODYN Windows internet Lepore Bow Ceounertation armuinpat na aa yareewhin fF A fe ia Yew Footer lob feb We BL Onnan wamane SS AuTOOMN ANSYS AUTODYN Variable Review Unstructured Real Variables RVL Index Index Number AUTOOYN Output Name Internal Vanable Name MRX MALY X VELOCITY Y VELOCITY Z VELOCITY ABS VEL XFORCE Y FOROE Z FORCE NODE MASS Mass nodal ANGVELX Angular velocity X Y y Corpse Rim
339. range Upper at the upper end of the I J K range e g ten fixed size cells centered e g twelve fixed size cells at the lower end e g eight fixed size cells at the upper end Cylinder 252 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual a Part Wizard Projectile Define Zoning Cylinder Mesh Type C Typel Type2 Cells across radius nA Cells along length nLl Imax 21 Jmas 21 9 Kmax 21 Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your cylinder The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 253 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but about a quarter of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Cells across radius Enter the number of cells elements you want to use across the radius of your cylinder in this field Cells along length Enter the number of cells elements you want to use along the length of your cylinder in this field Number of elements Displayed below the above input fiel
340. rdinates for node with index 2 2 1 3 0 3 0 3 0 x y Z coordinates for node with index 2 2 2 3 0 3 0 4 0 x y z coordinates for node with index 2 2 3 END The explicit form of this data would be as follows EXPLICIT Indicates explicit input is to follow SUB1 Name of the part for which data follows 111 0 00 0 0 0 x y Z coordinates for 1 1 1 1120 00 0 1 0 x y Z coordinates for 1 1 2 1210 0 1 00 0 x y z Coordinates for 1 2 1 1220 0 1 01 0 x y Z Coordinates for 1 2 2 211 1 00 0 0 0 x y Z coordinates for 2 1 1 2121 00 01 0 x y z coordinates for 2 1 2 2211 01 00 0 x y Z Coordinates for 2 2 1 2221 01 01 0 x y Z Coordinates for 2 2 2 SUB2 Name of the part for which data follows 1112 0 2 02 0 x y Z coordinates for 1 1 1 112202 03 0 x y z Coordinates for 1 1 2 1132 0 2 04 0 x y Z coordinates for 1 1 3 1212 03 02 0 x y Z Coordinates for 1 2 1 1222 0 3 03 0 x y Z coordinates for 1 2 2 1232 0 3 04 0 x y Z coordinates for 1 2 3 2113 02 02 0 x y z Coordinates for 2 1 1 2123 0 2 0 3 0 x y Z Coordinates for 2 1 2 2133 0 2 0 4 0 x y Z Coordinates for 2 1 3 2213 03 0 2 0 x y z Coordinates for 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 0 3 0 3 0 x y z coordinates for 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 0 3 0 4 0 x y z coordinates for 2 2 3 STOP Indicates end of all data With the explicit format it is not necessary to define coordinates for a complete block of nodes in index space and the order in which nodes are defined i
341. rections in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Automatic Select this option if you want the internal nodes to be spaced equipotentially IJK Straight 292 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select this option if you want the nodes along each I J and K line to be equally spaced along a straight line Geometric Ratios Input geometric ratios in the fields provided if you want to grade the zoning instead of generating equally spaced nodes Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 293 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Frag Bric page 1 Two dialog windows let you build a fragment or brick wall This first window lets you generate the zoning H Create Predef Zoning Fragme nt Brick Number of fragments bricks in x dir horizontal Number of fragments bricks in y dir vertical Number of fragments bricks in 2 dir minor Length of each fragment brick in x dir Length of each fragment brick in y dir Length of each fragment brick in 2 dir Mortar size between each frag brick in x dir Mortar size between each frag brick in y dir Mortar si
342. rgy is being transported fluxed from element to element This option determines if total energy or internal energy is being transported Total This option conserves the total energy kinetic internal energy during transport This is the most robust and accurate option and is the default Internal This option conserves the internal energy during transport In cases where the total energy transport doesn t provide an accurate answer e g material overheating or when the kinetic energy is predominant the Internal option might be chosen as an alternative Euler This option determines which transport algorithm will be used for multi material transport SLIC When material is being transported out of an element that contains multiple materials or voids it is necessary to use special rules to determine the amount of each material being transported because the only information available for the transport algorithm is the fraction of each material in the individual elements In AUTODYN the Simple Lime Interface Calculation SLIC method is used which uses a small number of stereotypes of mixed material element topologies The SLIC algorithm is the default and works well for all multi material Euler analysis Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Updated SLIC Isolated sma
343. rigin 0 0000000E 00 Y Origin 0 0000000E 00 Z Origin 0 0000000E 00 DX 10 00000 DY 10 00000 DZ 10 00000 GRADING NO GRADING J NO GRADING K NO DO FILL OPERATION TYPE Fill FILL BY INDEX Block min 1 max 11 J min 1 J max 11 K min 1 K max 11 FILL WITH INITIAL CONDITION SET No FILL MATERIAL AL 2024 Density 2 785000 Int Energy 0 0000000E 00 X Velocity 0 0000000E 00 Y Velocity 0 0000000E 00 Z Velocity 0 0000000E 00 RADIAL VELOCITY No ANGULAR VELOCITY No DO The PARTS command word is the name of the current command structure When other parts of the interface are covered by the command line each of the buttons on the Navigation panel will be a command structure i e Materials Boundaries etc The name of the part currently selected is then given in this case it is called target In this example the command being executed is a zoning command followed by a fill command indicates a command To see the current list of available commands can be typed at any time A denotes an option In the above example zoning allows you to choose from the list of zoning options Typing will give you the list of options for zoning the options are shown below E ALUTODYN Command Line Optioss for the flag ZONING Predst iselected Kasual Zoni Treusforaat ices Operations X to set parameters t lt Hpor star none valus c Reasabar
344. rmation of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Geometry Import Part Import Geometry from Lagrange Fill Part x Select parts to convert to objects wBbody 1 a WBbody 2 New beanane obec The parts list contains all structured Lagrange or unstructured volume parts in your model Select one or more of these parts to create an object that can then be packed with SPH particles You must enter a name for the new object to be created The images below show an example of a model with a projectile impacting a target The target modeled with tetrahedral volume elements in the first image has been converted to an SPH object and packed with SPH nodes This is shown in the second image Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 395 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual projectile_demo1 11 Cycle 0 TAGES Y Time 0 000E 000 ms Units mm mg ms Prgjectile_dernot 396 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual projectile _demot 11 Cycle 0 Y Time 0 000E 000 ms Units mm mg ms Prgjectile_dernot Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and con
345. rolling box at the foot of the window Cycle Time 1 1 637809225157053E 4 clock time msec 32856 update Cycle Time 2 3 43939941 1878227E 4 clock time msec 17030 Cycle Time 3 5 421148660224775E 4 clock time msec 17056 Cycle Time 4 7 601072880654561E 4 clock time msec 17029 Cycle Time 5 9 998989575100770E 4 clock time msec 17054 Cycle Time 6 1 263669799616239E 3 clock time msec 17016 Cycle Time 7 1 553817732221804E 3 clock time msec 17081 Cycle Time 8 1 872980465005591E 3 clock time msec 16994 Cycle Time 9 2 224059478677190E 3 clock time msec 17116 Cycle Time 10 2 610246402086324E 3 clock time msec 17024 Cycle Time 11 3 035052027043786E 3 clock time msec 17075 Cycle Time 12 3 502338224625149E 3 clock time msec 17070 Cycle Time 13 4 016353053105620E 3 clock time msec 17053 Cycle Time 14 4 581769376689206E 3 clock time msec 17019 Cycle Time 15 5 203727346111727E 3 clock time msec 17070 96 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Cycle Time Cycle Time Cycle Time Cycle Time Cycle Time AUTODYN User Manual 16 5 887881127305133E 3 clock time msec 17 6 640450302929377E 3 clock time msec 18 7 468276414058693E 3 clock time msec 34853 update 19 8 378885156037852E 3 clock time msec 17017 20 9 380554793925532E 3 clock time msec
346. rts only Similar to be able to use Gap contact the analysis model must contain structured Lagrangian Parts only Interaction Gap A gap is required for the interaction logic The size of this gap must be in the range 1 10 to 1 2 the dimension of the smallest element face of Parts involved in interactions For most models you should set the gap size close to the smallest allowed value Parts using a Lagrange or Shell Solver Gap size Enter a value for the Gap size in this field or press Calculate to have AUTODYN set it for you Gap Type Select whether you want to use an internal or external gap The external gap is strongly recommended because calculations using this option are more robust and more efficient However this option does require that interacting Parts are separated by the gap size at the start of your calculation Quick check Check this box to use a fast calculation for the interaction time step using only the maximum velocity in your problem You should only check this box if you know that your maximum velocities will always be in impact regions Calculate Press this button to have AUTODYN automatically calculate the Gap size for you The Gap size will be set to 1 10 the dimension of the smallest element face of Parts involved in interactions Check Press this button to check that the Gap size is valid and that all Parts involved in interactions are separated by the Gap size Erosion Release 12 1 2009 SAS
347. rts that have been excluded from contact in the Part interaction matrix Group contact is only available to faces of unstructured Parts and doesn t include friction Interaction Timestep AUTODYN automatically calculates an Interaction Timestep based on the Gap size and the maximum velocity of the Parts involved in interactions Safety Factor Enter the safety factor you want to use to calculate the Interaction Timestep in this field You cannot enter a value greater than the default value 0 2 Limiting Velocity Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 485 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the maximum velocity you want to use for calculating the Interaction Timestep in this field This option is useful if you have large velocities controlling the timestep that are not involved in interactions The default limiting velocity is larger than any velocity your model should encounter 486 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lagrange Lagrange 3D Trajectory Contact Options am ne ta OF er EVER ETO SGT AERE Interaction Trajectory Trajectory options Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserv
348. rved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Cells across radius Enter the number of cells elements you want to use across the radius of your circle in this field Number of elements Displayed below the input fields is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Ogive Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your ogive Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 245 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Type 1 Type 2 The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but some of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Cells across radius Enter the number of cells elements you want to use across the radius of your ogive in this field Number of elements Displayed below the input fields is the index space that will be used for your Part and the number of nodes and elements required Wedge 246 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Pu
349. s Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 498 Add first point Add point after Add point after Single point not attached to grid Single point attached to grid Multiple points generated anti clockwise around grid The selected polygon node is always shown in red The last point of Polygon is automatically connected to first point to close the Polygon Coupling Name Polygon Euler Part These boxes list the interaction sets you have defined for Polygon coupling Name The name of the interaction set Polygon The Polygon that is coupled to an Euler Part Euler Part The Euler Part that the Polygon is coupled to You can select a set in this list New Press this button to add a new interaction set Delete Press this button to delete the selected interaction set Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange Introduction The Euler Lagrange interaction Fluid Structure Interaction in AUTODYN couples the Eulerian domain to the Lagrangian structural domain This coupling algorithm in AUTODYN finds the intersection between the external faces of the interacting structures and the cells and faces of the Euler grids These intersection calculations give an exact calculation within numerical precision of the covered fraction of the Euler cells
350. s Microsoft Excel compatible Examine Use the Left Mouse Button to select a point on the graph The corresponding x and y values are displayed in the Examine panel 130 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Velocity vector Plot Type Settings Plot type Velocity vector nd Vector length scale 10 00000 om gt Scale factor 10 000000 Fix scale Arrow type f Line C Solid Vector scales Fix scales V Surface vectors only for LAGZALE Vector density reduction factor J reduction factor K reduction factor This panel lets you set the following options for velocity vector plots Vector Length Scale This slider lets you set the scale factor of the arrows that are drawn for this plot type You can alternatively type in a scale factor in the box below the slider You can also fix this scale factor so that all plots use the same scale The range for this factor is calculated from the maximum velocity and the physical dimensions of your model Arrow Type This option lets you choose the type of arrows that are plotted Solid arrows take longer to plot than line arrows the default Vector scales AUTODYN chooses vector scales automatically using the maximum and minimum velocities in the model You can override these scales and set
351. s OK to remove the material from the Part s 2 Material is used Remove material from Parts Yes No Elements that have their material removed become Unused 196 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials Load Load Material Model Equation of State Strength Model Fare Model i A This window lets you load materials from the current Material Library The available materials are listed in a vertical scroll box For each material four columns provide its material name Equation of State Strength Model and Failure Model Press the button at the top of each column to sort materials alphanumerically in that column Using the control and shift keys as necessary you can select one or more materials Press BEJ to load the selected materials into your model Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 197 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Press _Delete to delete the selected materials from the library 198 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual
352. s box shows all the Parts that can be coupled to Euler You can select one or more Parts in this list Add Press this button to add the selected Parts to be coupled with Euler Add all Press this button to add all the Parts to be coupled with Euler Remove Press this button to remove the selected Parts from being coupled with Euler Remove all Press this button to remove all Parts from being coupled with Euler 508 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Review Press this button to add review all coupling with Euler Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 509 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Thickness Define FCT shell coupling thickness xj Select Part hullt HULL 2 composite Coupling thickness 50 000000 Direction Centred C Positive Negative Review As well as being able to couple volume element solvers it is also possible in AUTODYN to couple shell solvers For a shell solver the parts do not have any geometric through thickness dimension and as such cannot cover any volume in the Euler mesh Therefore each shell part needs to be artificially thickened by the user
353. s identified below the actual material parameters will not be read into AUTODYN and you should ensure that all materials are properly defined after the import At present a subset of the material definitions and parameters are automatically read into AUTODYN These include materials of type rigid elastic piecewise linear plasticity and spring elastic material models Initial and Boundary Conditions Every element property is translated into an Initial Condition in AUTODYN and allocated to the appropriate elements Fixed and prescribed boundary conditions are imported from the bulk data file into AUTODYN These are converted into the equivalent AUTODYN boundary conditions including parameters where possible Initial velocities defined on nodes and sets of nodes in the bulk data file are read into AUTODYN and converted into Initial Conditions The initial condition is also automatically applied to the identified nodes Bulk Data Compatibility The current capabilities of the AUTODYN import capability for MSC NASTRAN bulk data files is summarized below Compatibility BEGIN BULKDATA CBAR Only grid numbers to define local x Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 81 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual y plane CBEAM Only grid numbers to define local x y plane No coordinate system no SPC
354. s let you select all gauge points all gauge points associated with a part or individually by number For the last two cases additional dialog prompts you for the part names or gauge numbers as required Marker scale Each gauge point is represented by a marker This slider lets you set the marker size Text labels Check this box to label each marker with its corresponding gauge number Text size This defines the text size used for the label Label bounds Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 133 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Check this box to put a bounding box around each label Label offset Check this box to set your own offset position for labels Leading line Check this box if you want to show lines joining each marker to its label Radial offset Check this box if you want to use radial label offsets instead of linear offsets X Y Z offset These sliders let you adjust the label offset distance in the X Y and Z directions 134 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Boundary Plot Type Settings Plot type Boundary v Pressure AI lace cenied All node centred Marker scale 10 00 Ki gt This panel
355. s of the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system are described in the online help for the Mechanical analysis systems in Workbench Models setup in the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system can be persistently linked to an AUTODYN system to transfer material data mesh connections loads and constraints analysis settings etc into ANSYS AUTODYN For modeling complex geometries in ANSYS AUTODYN we recommend you define the FE components of the model in an ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system then transfer the model setup to the AUTODYN system and add on your Euler SPH regions and explicit FSI Coupling as required Mesh system The Mesh system is located in the Component Systems toolbox of the Workbench GUI This system allows you to link to your model geometry and generate a mesh The mesh can then be transferred to an AUTODYN system for subsequent analysis This system allows you to use a similar workflow that was available at release 11 to link AUTODYN models to CAD geometry and meshing tools However with Version 12 the link is not persistent anymore which means that with every update of the workflow system the definitions made in AUTODYN material filling boundary condition assignment etc are lost and have to be re applied Therefore at release 12 we recommend using the ANSYS Explicit Dynamics system to link to CAD geometry and generate a mesh for use in AUTODYN where loads constraints and material assignments are maintained after any change to the ge
356. s operations Component List The top box displays a list of the Components you have defined You can select a Component in this list New Press this button to create a new Component Modify Press this button to modify an existing Component Delete Press this button to delete a Component 400 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Review Press this button to review existing Components Fill Material Press this button to fill all Parts of the selected Component with a material Velocity Press this button to assign a velocity to all Parts of the selected Component Initial Conditions Press this button to assign initial conditions to all Parts of the selected Component Boundary Apply Boundary Press this button to apply a boundary condition to the selected Component Clear Boundary Press this button to clear a boundary condition from the selected Component with a material Transformations Translate Press this button to translate all Parts of the selected Component Rotate Press this button to rotate all Parts of the selected Component Scale Press this button to scale all Parts of the selected Component Operations Copy Press this button to copy the selected Component Note that unstructured Parts cannot be copied Delete Press this b
357. s reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Grid Plot Type Settings Plot type Grid v Grid lines C None C Dutline Grid V Colored grid lines IV Hidden line removal allow examine Opacity 1 00 4 _ gt Enable zoning plot This panel lets you set the following options for grid plots some options are not present for 2D models Grid lines These options let you view grids with or without grid lines or with just the outline of the grids displayed Colored grid lines Check this box to display grid lines in color otherwise they are displayed in black Hidden line removal allow examine Check this box to view grids with hidden line removal The Examine feature is only available if hidden line removal is chosen Opacity This slider lets you set the opacity for your view It is only functional if hidden line removal is selected An opacity of 1 0 means you cannot see inside a grid An opacity of 0 0 is equivalent to turning hidden line removal off i e you can see everything inside the grid Enable zoning plot By default you will only see the parts of a grid that are filled with material Check this box to see all zoning including unused elements Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 119 of
358. s this button to detach the command line panel from the main user interface and open it in a separate dialog window If this window is then closed the Command Line docks back into the main user interface E AUTODYN Command Line Beta Status Origins 0 O000000E 00 DXi 000000 DY i 000000 DZ 2_ 000000 16 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual When the command line is detached from the main UI the command dialog panel contains three separate lists The Command History is shown on the left hand side and contains all valid commands executed in the current session Multiple commands can be selected from this list to be replayed The Message Output panel is shown at the bottom This provides the user with help if they request it and gives any error messages when invalid commands are performed The Commands to be processed list behaves the same as the command line when docked into the main UI but is much more user friendly and allows multiple lines to be input before pressing the process button Any commands selected from the History list are copied into the commands to be processed panel and can then be edited before being processed The example above shows how you can replay a zoning operation In this case the DZ parameter is modified before the command is re proc
359. s to an IJK block of nodes I J K Plane Press this button to apply motion constraints to an Il J or K plane of nodes Node Press this button to apply a motion constraint to a single node Modify ALE Settings Press this button to change various ALE settings Select motion for plotting Select the motion constraint you want to plot in this scrolling box All nodes with the selected motion constraint will be highlighted in the plot 384 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Parts Motions Block Kad Apply ALE Motions From From J Select motion Free Lagrange Fixed Euler Equal Spacing Equal Spacing Y Equal Spacing Z Select Block To l From K Tok AUTODYN User Manual This window lets you apply an ALE motion constraint to a block of nodes in IJK space Select Block Enter the IJK range for the block to which you want to apply the motion constraint in the fields provided Select motion Select the motion constraint you want to apply from the list provided Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 385 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Motions I J K Plane EJ Apply ALE Motions
360. s unimportant When this option is used for a specific block of nodes in index space the indent zon file is scanned and only those nodes defined in this file and within the specified part and block to be initialized will be assigned coordinate values Thus standard zoning options could be used to define the bulk of the grid and the User option called to redefine the coordinates of a few isolated nodes Before reading in an explicit zoning file the parts must already be created The file can then be read in using the Import button on the Parts Zoning panel 72 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The above example is for 3D For 2D models the format is the same except of course there is no K index or Z coordinates Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 73 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Import ICEM Open ICEM zon file AX Look in DATA3D ef Be m Samples pre p o Files of type zoning files geo glb v Cancel This window lets you import grid data from ICEM CFD Navigate to the ICEM CFD zoning file you want to import geo and press Open to open the following w
361. saebs ic eestrariensgeossncnteeciestpesseecbnieceernustearieteeediad 163 History Write TexXPOuUnourt sue cesceerscasccetccesdanzscateneetessieegus eae gsoetp teeta 164 Multiple Variable Plotis sce scare esses alee ie cease eee dates Aa 165 History Multiple Variable Plot cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeee 165 History Multiple Variable Plot Set All Plots ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 167 History Multiple Variable Plot Modify Selected Plot ceseeeeeeees 169 History SIVIN AR ee 8 ie oe ene he ee eee Nel AN te eee Ne Ne ed 171 PISTON SOU SCAICS sta cancer ccs tite recs tava cectiiedetnas aa ead detecwee tas 172 History Set Plot Styles cece sceisd seca cee ns ede nce iad ces ahead adie ete 174 History Set Legend Position s sscces ce tucson tare hielo oe hacen Sect santeeg ems 176 History Load kadonneena a aa aAA Prine ENEN EAEan EET EA ENESA TE UREN er 177 A 0 5 bo ean vet SR ORE OO RES AT PORE A E E E ORE TO 179 View Slides Slide Viewer cccceeeescsseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 183 MTG VAS oe gine Sete da te See debe tas ou baie i den aa i Taa capil ae eiai adii eiii teni 188 Mate lAlStctisetict tetas ttccatet ciel a taut cesta a ate A eta A talc A 188 Materials New MOGIfY ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeneee 190 Matenals CODY aea Neh Ae EAN Ne eth A ed an A 195 Release 12 1 2009
362. sec 2 K sec 2 This window lets you assign sub domains to Tasks performed on each CPU The efficiency of parallel processing is very dependent on distributing sub domains among the tasks so that each task has approximately the same amount of work computing to do Automatic Manual assignment If you select Automatic assignment of Sub domains to Tasks AUTODYN will automatically distribute sub domains among the tasks using load balancing algorithms You do not need to input any further data if you use this option If you select Manual assignment of Sub domains to Tasks further input dialog is presented Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 545 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual ka Task Assignment amp Assign Subdomains to Tasks Automatic Manual PROJECTILE I sec 3 J sec 2 K sec 4 TARGET l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGET2 l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 TARGETS l sec 2 J sec 2 K sec 2 CURRENTLY USING 1 TASKIS Hevea Soe C Manually assign to tasks B Number of tasks O BameNw Parts List The box at the top of the window lists the Parts whose Sub domains you need to assign You can select a Part in this list Review Assignments Press this button to view a list of all Sub domains and the tasks to which they are assigned
363. ser Manual Parts Solvers Structured Solution 2D Shells ia Solver Solution Options B Type of solution C Membrane Bending Shell material location Left Center C Right This window lets you set solution options for 2D shell Parts Type of Solution Select whether you want to compute a membrane solution or a solution with full bending moments Shell material location Shell segments have no geometrical thickness so this option lets you select the location of the shell material relative to its geometric position Left Material is located to the left of the shell as you progress from the first node to the last node Center Material is located equally on either side of the shell i e from h 2 to h 2 where h is the thickness Right Material is located to the right of the shell as you progress from the first node to the last node 364 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Structured Solution 3D Shells kad Solver Solution Options Type of solution C Membrane Bending 2 sublayers Bending 3 sublayers This window lets you set solution options for 3D shell Parts Type of Solution Select whether you want to compute a membrane solution or a solution with full bending mo
364. served Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the number of cells elements you want to use in the and J directions in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Automatic Select this option if you want the internal nodes to be spaced equipotentially IJ Straight Select this option if you want the nodes along each and J line to be equally spaced along a straight line Geometric Ratios Input geometric ratios in the fields provided if you want to grade the zoning instead of generating equally spaced nodes Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 291 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Hex Create Predef Zoning Select node to edit lt gt gt Coordinate node 1 0 000000 Coordinate node 1 0 000000 Z Coordinate node 1 0 000000 fe Automatic WWK straigh Geometric Ratio 1 000000 J Geometric Ratio 1 000000 IN K Geometric Ratio 000000 Select Node to Edit Use the arrow buttons to select each of the 8 nodes in turn Coordinates Enter the X Y and Z coordinates of the node Cells in I J K direction Enter the number of cells elements you want to use in the J and K di
365. signments Press this button to assign the sub domains to Tasks performed on each CPU Automatic Unstructured Parts The automatic domain decomposition for unstructured parts is conducted using a recursive bisection method This takes into account the geometric location of elements the element type and the element density Set Decomposition Press this button to select the parts to be included in decomposition Plot parallel decomposition Press this button to see the domain decomposition and task assignments for the current Decomposition Set Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 539 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parallel Add Modify Modify Host Configuration Set ZOEAUTODYN1 2 Tasks POCALITONYNOL 9 Take ZUEAUTODYN2 2 Tasks Add Host Delete Host Hoane Z OEAUTOON tT Emel pah Epon Fd YS rey se td Newnes O This window lets you create a new Host Configuration or modify an existing Host Configuration Set Configuration Set If you are creating a new Host Configuration Set enter its name in this field If you are modifying an existing Host Configuration Set the name of the current configuration set is displayed in this field 540 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiar
366. ssing Host Confiauration Sets Current None z Add Modify Delete Decomposition Sets Current TWO Add Delete Selected decomposition Manual Structured Parts Subdomains Task Assignments Automatic Unstructured Parts Set Decomposition Plot parallel decomposition This panel lets you set up your model for parallel processing For more additional information about setting up a parallel analysis see also the AUTODYN Parallel Processing Tutorial Version 12 0 Manual Structured Parts The structured Lagrangian solver is decomposed along its grid lines These provide an easy and obvious method to decompose any structured Parts whilst maximizing the load balancing and minimizing the communication Activate parallel processing Check this box to activate parallel processing If this box is checked your model will Run be executed in parallel when you press gt Host Configuration Sets Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 537 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual This input lets you configure the hardware you want to use for parallel processing by defining one or more Host Configuration Sets These configuration sets are saved independently of your model Any sets you create will automatically be available for other models you have set up The box at the top sh
367. st Block Remap X Write Datafile C Read Datafile Filename w ben3d1 This window lets you write fill data to or from datafiles fil for performing fast block remaps The standard remapping scheme for 3D to 3D Euler FCT is very useful in blast modeling but in certain circumstances can take a very long time to search for the cells in the remapping range especially if the part size is very large for example more than 2 million cells The fast block remapping command maps several cells from a fine mesh of a small space into a single cell in a relatively coarse mesh of a large space directly without searching for the remapping range Thus the efficiency of the remapping process has been improved dramatically The fast block remapping procedure is applicable to Euler FCT parts only The scheme allows unused cells in the remapping region However cover fractions are not considered in the remapping calculations so block remapping should not be applied to any region of the part where Euler FCT Lagrange or Euler FCT Shell coupling takes place Write Datafile Select this option if you want to write fill data for the current Part to a fil file Read Datafile 342 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select this option if you want to read fill data for
368. story Multiple Variable Plot Multiple Variable Plot This window lets you compose a multiple variable plot Multiple variable plots can contain one or more plots histories each with different variables for the X and Y axes This window list the plots histories you have currently define displaying for each one its Ident Gauge number X variable and Y variable Below this list are four buttons Select Press this button to quickly add multiple plots to the list Modify Select a plot in the list and press this button to modify its settings Add plot Select a plot in the list and press this button to add a new plot to the list The initial settings for the new plot will be the same as the selected plot but you can modify these values immediately in the dialog window that opens Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 165 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Delete plot Press this button to delete a plot from the list The choices you have available for gauges and variables will depend on the type of plot you have chosen Gauge points Material Summaries etc 166 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual History Multiple
369. surfaces of your cylinder can be flat concave or convex If you select a concave or convex surface you will have to specify its radius of curvature Mesh Type Select a Type 1 or Type 2 mesh for your cylinder The type 1 mesh is more efficient in using elements but some elements are not very rectangular which can reduce the accuracy of your solution All the elements of a type 2 mesh are reasonably rectangular but about a quarter of the elements generated for this mesh are unused Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 285 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Sphere ka Create Predef Zoning Whole Half C Quarter C Eighth Solid C Hollow x origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000 Outer radius Ri 0 000000 dar dra Dr Mesh Type C Typel Type 2 This window lets you generate a sphere Section Choose the section you want to generate Whole Half Quarter or Eighth This should match any symmetry planes you have defined for your model Solid or Hollow Choose either a solid or hollow sphere If you choose a hollow sphere you will have to specify inner and outer radii for the sphere Origin Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the center of the sphere in the fields provided Radius 286 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc Al
370. t in significant improvements in efficiency The primary use of mass scaling is to increase the CFL timestep of a small number of very small or stiff elements in the model which otherwise would have controlled the timestep for all elements Using this option AUTODYN will automatically add artificial mass to individual elements to ensure that their CFL timestep is at least equal to a value defined by you Mass scaling should only be used if the increased inertia of the scaled elements does not significantly affect the results of the simulation Mass scaling can also be used to increase the CFL timestep of elements that become highly distorted during the simulation Extreme care should be taken to ensure that results obtained remain physical Mass scaling is activated under Controls Timestep and the input parameters are defined as follows Automatic Activate automatic mass scaling Mass Scaling Frequency Cycle frequency that AUTODYN will adjust the element mass cycles scaling Recommended default is only at start up cycle 0 Post cycle 0 adjustment will only take place for solid elements Min CFL Mass scaling is applied to all elements with a CFL timestep timestep less than the specified value Max element Maximum mass scaling factor that can be applied to an scaling element Default is 100 equating to 100 times original mass If this limit is exceeded no more mass is added to this element Max part Maximum added mass that
371. t in this field This is used to determine when a partially covered Euler cell is blended to a neighbor Euler subcycling 506 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select whether you want Euler subcycling On or Off Euler shell interactions Select Press this button to select the Lagrangian Parts you want to couple to Euler Thickness Press this button to specify the shell thickness you want to use for the coupling calculation Joins Press this button to specify which shells are to be joined for the coupling calculation Review Press this button to review your Euler Shell interactions Weak coupling settings Browse for weak coupling data file Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 507 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Euler Lagrange 3D Select ka Select parts to couple to Euler FCT X Parts coupled to Euler FCT Select parts to add remove F Add all Remove Remove al This window lets you select the Lagrangian Parts you want to couple to Euler Parts coupled to Euler FCT This box shows you the current Parts that are coupled to Euler Select parts to add remove Thi
372. t material to copy from STEEL EquationofState Linear Strength vonMises Failure None Erosion GeometricStrain MaterialCutoffs Copy to f New Material Existing Material New materialname f a This window lets you copy component data from an existing material to either a new material or another existing material Select material to copy from Select the material you want to copy from this pull down menu Select data components to copy Check the box alongside the components you want to include in the copy process Copy to Choose to copy the data to a new material or an existing material If you copy to a new material components not copied will be set to the default state If you copy to an existing material components not copied will retain their existing state New material name If you choose to copy to a new material enter your name for the new material in this field Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 195 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Materials Delete Kd Delete Material Models Select materials to be deleted This window lets you delete materials from your model Select the material s you want to delete and press aa If the material you want to delete has been assigned to one or more Parts you will be asked to confirm that it
373. t nodes can be merged into a single unstructured node This option will increase the robustness in many applications involving joins Using the Bonded Face Connections option allows the nodes of an unstructured Part to be bonded to a face of another unstructured Part Bonded contact alleviates the requirement that for joining purposes two nodes need to reside at the same physical location The nodes that are to be bonded to a face may have an offset with respect to the face and the offset is a user defined maximum physical normal distance of a node from a face which can be bonded together Join Press this button to join Parts Join All Press this button to join all Parts Unjoin Press this button to unjoin Parts Unjoin All Press this button to unjoin all Parts Matrix Press this button to defined join Parts using a matrix Review Press this button to review which Parts are currently joined Join tolerance Enter the tolerance you want AUTODYN to use in determining which nodes should be joined Press the Set button to set this tolerance The default value for the join tolerance will take care of small round off differences in node location and will give good results The tolerance should not artificially be increased to try to join nodes with a clear offset with respect to each other Merge joined nodes 442 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS
374. tate amp Keyboard Option Rotate mouse and keyboard Rotate combination Mouse Option Zoon amp Keyboard Option Zoom mouse and keyboard Zoom combination 28 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Mouse Option Translate amp Keyboard Translate mouse and keyboard Option Translate combination Mouse Option Toolbar amp Keyboard Option Toolbar mouse and keyboard Toolbar combination This is the default combination for the interaction type selected on the toolbar Mouse Option Examine amp Keyboard Option Examine mouse and keyboard Examine combination Mouse Option Boxzoom and Keyboard Box zoom mouse and keyboard Option Boxzoom combination PrePost license usage By default this switch is set to zero and AUTODYN will start up using a solver license When the switch is set to zero AUTODYN will start up using a PrePost license only Additional user title This option lets you add additional information below the top left hand corner of the View Panel You can enter up to 256 characters The Additional User Title should always be the last option in the file Command Line Options This feature has Beta status and can be activated by the user by adding the following lines above the Additional User Title option in the autodyn ini file command_line_on 1 By activating this
375. ter Xx origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 000000 Start Outer Rad Ri 000000 End Outer Riad FR 000000 Start Inner Rad r 000000 End Inner Rad r 0 000000 Length L 0 000000 B Start Outer Rad RB k B End Outer Rad RB B Start Inner Rad rB B End Inner Rad rB Principal Direction 11 1x ny nz Rot About 11 You may define either a whole half or quarter cylinder by selecting the appropriate option To define the cylinder first enter the XYZ coordinates of the start of the cylinder axis You are then prompted for the start and end radius of the cylinder If you wish to define a hollow cylinder enter inner radii for the start and end of the cylinder Otherwise to define a solid cylinder leave these two values as zero You may also define a cylinder which is elliptical in cross section To do this you must provide extra radii information This is indicated on the figure on the left hand side of the window The orientation of the cylinder is defined by a principal direction vector which corresponds to the axis of the cylinder and a rotation about this vector When the cylinder is defined a wire frame representation is shown on the screen together with an arrow displaying the principal vector direction Sphere 392 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published
376. ter the X Y or Z coordinate of the plane in this field Initiation Time Enter the initiation time in field unless you chose to have it computed Limit range of application Check this box if you want to limit the range of application of the detonation point extra dialog is presented 530 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Range will Include Exclude region For each Part you can specify an index range that is used to limit the range of application of the detonation point Select whether you want the index range to specify the included region or the excluded region Part list This window lists all the Parts in your model Select a Part in this window to limit its range of application IJK range Enter the IJK range you want to use to limit the range of application of the detonation point in the fields provided Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 531 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Detonation 3D Cylinder kal Define detonations Define Cylinder Avis Oe ab ae Radius 0 000000 Yo 0 000000 Z 0 000000 Initiation Time 0 000000 IV Limit range of application Range will Include Exclude PROJECT
377. tes Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Modify Modify Component STIFF1 SHELL 100 STIFF2 SHELL 100 STIFF3 SHELL 100 STIFF4 SHELL 100 This window lets you modify a Component Name Change the name of your Component in this field All Parts This box shows a list of all the Parts in your model not currently in your Component You can select one or more Parts in this list Component Parts This box shows a list of the Parts you have chosen for your Component You can select one or more Parts in this list Add 404 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select one or more Parts in the left box and press this button to add the selected Parts to your Component The Parts will be removed from the list in the left box and added to the list in the right box Remove Select one or more Parts in the right box and press this button to remove the selected Parts to your Component The Parts will be removed from the list in the right box and added to the list in the left box Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 405 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components Delete Kd Delete Component
378. th a single material Multiple materials can be represented in a single body by creating multiple parts and joining them together Note that a hexahedral mesh will generally provide more efficient results than a tetrahedral mesh hence we only recommend the use of predominantly tetrahedral mesh models for convenience of mesh generation Tet SCP Tet ANP Comparison of SCP and ANP Tet Elements for an impact Taylor test involving large amounts of plastic deformation The ANP Tet fives results comparable with experiments 1 Burton A J Explicit Large Strain Dynamic Finite Element Analysis with Applications to Human Body Impact Problems PhD Thesis University of Wales December 1996 2 Bonet J Burton A J A simple averaged nodal pressure tetrahedral element for incompressible and nearly incompressible dynamic explicit applications Communications in Numerical Methods in Engineering 1998 14 437 449 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 379 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Solvers Unstructured Shell Solver Options abd nie Advanced Shear correction factor 10 833333 BEW warp conection Yes v Thickness update Nodal Inertia update Recompute v Number of sublayers Specify the number of through thickness integration points for an isotropic shell The default of 3 is s
379. th the left mouse button To delete the last polygon point use the Shift button together with the left mouse button To complete the polygon use the Control and left mouse button After completing the polygon the selected nodes or faces are displayed Press the button to accept this selection and add to the current Group At any stage the button may be used to cancel the process Note that the Polygon Remove option is not available greyed out when you have zoomed into the model using the rubber band zoom option using lt Ctrl gt Left mouse button Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual To be able to use the Polygon Remove option you should use the zoom option available from the Tool Bar of AUTODYN Surface Add Press this button to choose a surface and add its nodes faces or elements to the selected Group Select a face using Alt and the left mouse button Any faces that are joined to the selected face and have a normal angle between the two faces of less than a value you specify are then added to the group For example selecting an element on the side of a cube would add all faces on that side of the cube By setting the surface angle cut off to a sufficiently large value curved surfaces may also be selected After selecting a face the corresponding surface
380. the AUTODYN Tool Bar e Rotate view d Translate view A Zoom in or out Set view brings up a window that allows you to set an exact view Reset view to the initial view Turn perspective on or off toggle w zi hY De Frames Slider This slider lets you move quickly to any frame in the animation s Speed Slider This slider lets you adjust the playback speed for animations Loop Check this box if you want the animation s to automatically start again from the first frame when the last frame is reached 34 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview AUTODYN in Workbench An overview of how to access AUTODYN in Workbench at release 12 is provided below Full guidance on how to use Workbench at release 12 is provided in the on line help system of Workbench A new paradigm for managing simulations is used with the ANSYS Workbench GUI at release 12 The ANSYS Workbench GUI now consists primarily of a Toolbox region Project Schematic Toolbar and menu bar Depending on the analysis type and or application or workspace you may also see other windows tables charts etc f Example Workbench Fle View Tools Unts Hep Dien on led Save Wal Save As ip Raconnect JB Refresh Project 7 Update Project t dlingo Q Proja Too X 99 Explck Dynamics ANS
381. the current Part from a previously written fil file Filename Enter the file name in this field do not append fil Typical steps that will be undertaken when using Block Remapping for blast problems are as follows 1 Load the original building data file 2 Modify the part so it only contains a small area of the explosive and the surrounding buildings 3 Refine the mesh then remap 1D or 2D data to the refined part 4 Save the file and start calculation 5 At the wrapup cycle when the explosive wave approaches the boundary of the refined part output the blast field to a remap file 6 Load the original building data file again 7 Modify the part so it contains a larger area 8 Refine the mesh 9 Read the remap file 10 Save the file and continue running 11 Repeat 5 10 as necessary An example of an analysis of a blast in a city centre that was performed using the block remapping facility is shown below The city centre is represented using an Euler FCT mesh with unused regions to represent buildings as shown below Note that the original zoning and fill operations for this model were set up using the new block fill command a side view b plan view Layout of original Euler FCT part representing city centre To perform the initial expansion of the blast the central section of the grid as shown below in figure a is taken and refined by a factor of 4 as shown in figure b Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP In
382. the elements in the mesh to give a physical dimension Element will be erode Interaction by Group In many calculations the contact region may be relatively small in comparison to the entire model and as the interactions calculation is numerically intensive it would be beneficial if the scope of its work were limited to this smaller area The Group Contact option allows the user to select a set of face groups to describe the extent of the interactions in unstructured models Select the Specify Group Contacts by Group toggle and press Select to open the Select Groups to include in Contact dialog and use the Add Remove button to specify which face groups are to be included in the contact calculations Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 491 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select Groups to include in Contact During execution any faces eroded will be removed from the group and any new faces uncovered will be added to a group named Uncovered faces Unstructured Beams and SPH can also be included as a node group to participate in contact 492 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual coram AFS Fareed corte C0 Facees
383. the translation in these fields 306 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Rotate ka Zoning Transformation PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Laarange 17 41 7 TARGET2 Lagrange 5 10 3 TARGETS Lagrange 5 10 3 lt Rotation deg 0 000000 Rotation about axis Y axis C Z axis This window lets you rotate nodes about an axis in XYZ space Current IJK Range Select this option to apply the rotation to all nodes in the current IJK Range Selected Parts Select this option to apply the rotation to all nodes of selected Parts A box lets you select one or more Parts Rotation Input the rotation angle in degrees X Y Z axis Specify the axis about which the nodes will be rotated Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 307 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Scale ka Zoning Transformation PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Laarange 17 41 7 TARGET2 Lagrange 5 10 3 TARGETS Lagrange 5 10 3 lt ii gt x origin 0 000000 Y origin Z origin x scale factor Y scale factor 2 scale factor This window lets you scale nodes relative
384. there ix Hyaa to t the full nase For the example given here predef is chosen as the option The predef zoning option has a sub option PREDEF GEOMETRY which allows the user to choose the predef they want to zone In this simple example the box predef is chosen and the required parameters have been set 14 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual When all the parameters have been set the DO command is issued which executes the command The easiest way to use the command line and become familiar with the command structure is to use the user interface to zone and fill parts as usual The commands will then be recorded and can then be edited and played back as described above Also as can be seen in the picture above some guidance is given in the history window for the syntax used to set options and parameters etc should you choose to type in the commands directly Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 15 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Undock Command Line E ANSYS ALITODYN AUITODYN Fle ipat Setup Execution Wew Optors Hep Mero ee eibehek ek Lol Bel ELI Parts D hate Lagrange 24 18 13 Zoning fal Pres
385. this field This is how the bricks are staggered along the length of the wall e g if the offset is 0 5 the default the bricks will be staggered halfway across each other as shown in the above figure Fragment brick symmetric about X 0 Check this box if you want the wall to be symmetric about X 0 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 295 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Frag Bric page 2 Two dialog windows let you build a fragment or brick wall This second window lets you fill the wall grid with materials and initial conditions Create Predef Zoning Fill mortar with unused Frag Brick Initial Cond 7 Frag Brick Material STEEL Density 7 900000 Int Energy x velocity Y velocity Z velocity Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical v Fill mortar with unused Check this box if you do not want the mortar to be represented as a material If you check this box no elements will be generated for the mortar If you do not check this box elements will be generated for the mortar If the mortar thickness is small compared to the dimension of the brick elements the time step is likely to be reduced significantly Fill with Initial Condition Set Check this box if you want to fill your wall Part using an Initial Condition Set
386. tion of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual 0 Black background 1 White background Plot wireframe This switch sets the wireframe plotting option on or off on startup 0 Plot wireframe off 1 Plot wireframe on Plot perspective This switch sets the perspective plotting option on or off on startup 0 Plot perspective off 1 Plot perspective on Hardware acceleration This switch sets hardware graphics acceleration on or off on startup 0 Hardware graphics acceleration off 1 Hardware graphics acceleration on Model Interactivity default This switch sets the default model interaction setting for the toolbar mouse keyboard combination on startup 1 Translate model 2 Rotate model 3 Zoom in out Reset plot flags This switch sets reset plot flags on or off If this flag is on when you load a new model or a different cycle of the current model the plot settings for all Parts will be reset to default values e g default view material locations etc If this flag is off when you load a new model or a different cycle of the current model with a model already present the plot settings grid material location material status contour for the current model are migrated to the new model for each Part with the same name O Reset plot flags off 1 Reset plot flags on Graded background Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary
387. tion Bar Create textslide Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 3 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Manual Automatic refresh ea Refresh screen Stop all plotting 4 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Overview Navigation Bar The Navigation Bar contains two groups of buttons The top group of buttons View let you control what you see in the View Panel From here you can access and modify plot settings view history plots and create or view slide shows animations View Plots Settings History silik Slides i View Slides The lower group of buttons Setup let you access dialog panels to set up your model Starting at the top button Materials and working down to the Run button you can build your model in the most efficient and logical way Setup Materials Init Cond Boundaries Parts Groups Joins Interaction Detonation Parallel Controls Output User var HUGE HU NaI The Problem Setup section explains this procedure in detail The Run button at the foot of the bar is used to run execute problems Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains
388. tion is removed from any nodes or faces that lie within the 2D polygon Boundary Select the boundary condition you want to clear from this pull down menu Close the window with the button to enter the polygon definition stage Select the polygon using the Alt key together with the left mouse button To delete the last polygon point use the Shift button together with the left mouse button To complete the polygon use the Control and left mouse button After completing the polygon the selected nodes or faces are displayed Press the button to accept this selection and clear the boundary condition At any stage the button may be used to cancel the process Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 353 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Gauges Parts Gauges Pressing the Gauges button in the Parts panel displays the following dialog in the lower region of the panel Define Gauge Points Add Move Delete Review MV Plot gauge points V Interactive Selection Oo coat Use lt Alt Left Mouse to select Element Node This dialog lets you define gauge points in the current Part Add Press this button to add one or more gauge points Move Press this button to relocate a gauge point Delete Press this button to delete one or more gauge points Review Press this button to re
389. tions occur for example because of round off and should be used with care because the analysis model geometry is changed Note that it may not be possible to remove all initial penetrations with this algorithm Features are available in the DesignModeler and Meshing application to prevent initial penetrations occurring Undo This option will restore the geometry of the analysis model before the initial penetrations were fixed It is recommended that the fixed initial penetrations are checked before the model is modified further otherwise it may not be possible to undo the last fix operation Erosion Retain inertia of eroded nodes Check this box if you want to retain the inertial of eroded nodes otherwise eroded nodes are removed from the model Interaction by Part Add Press this button to set interaction between Parts Add All Press this button to set all Parts to interact with each other Remove Press this button to remove interaction between Parts Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 489 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Remove All Press this button to remove all interactions between Parts Matrix Press this button to set interactions using a Part matrix Range Press this buttons to set the index range of each Part that will be checked for interactions Friction Press this button
390. to Unstructured ce Settings History Slides View Sides Setup Select plot type for selected part Fill type Additi compo This pull down menu lets you import grid data from other programs from TrueGrid zon Lets you import block zoning data from TrueGrid from ICEM geo Lets you import block zoning data from ICEM CFD from LS DYNA k Lets you import k files from LS DYNA from MSC NASTRAN bdf dat Lets you import bdf files from Nastran Convert IJK to Unstructured Lets you convert existing IJK structured Parts to Unstructured Parts 68 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 69 AUTODYN User Manual Pull down Menu Import TrueGrid Open TrueGrid zon file Look in E Samples gt a EB E KPIPE1 Z0N Files of type zoning files zon X Cancel A This window lets you import grid data from TrueGrid Navigate to the TrueGrid zoning file you want to import zon and press on to open the following window EA TrueGrid Import Facility BLKOOO01 BLKOOOO Import all parts Import selected parts Select
391. to an origin in XYZ space Current IJK Range Select this option to apply the rotation to all nodes in the current IJK Range Selected Parts Select this option to apply the rotation to all nodes of selected Parts A box lets you select one or more Parts Origin Input the X Y and Z coordinates of the origin for the scaling Scale Factors Input the X Y and Z scale factors 308 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Copy ka Copy Part Zoning amp Pick part to copy zoning from PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Lagrange 17 41 7 TARGET Lagrange 5 10 3 TARGETS Lagrange 510 31 Lower index Lower J index Lower K index This window lets you copy zoning from an existing Part to the current IJK Range Pick part to copy Select the Part you want copy zoning from in this box Lower I J K index Specify the lower I J and K indices of the block you want to copy from in these fields A block starting at these lower indices will be copied to the current IJK Range Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 309 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Delete Delete Part Zoning
392. to define static and dynamic friction between different Parts Review Press this button to review all your interaction settings User defined friction Aside from the friction definition through the interaction by Part method described above there is also a user defined friction option available through the use of a user subroutine called EXFRICTION Interaction by Part Add Add ll Remove Remove ail Matrix Range Friction Review Self interaction Tol 0 200000 Interaction by Group Self Interaction If the self interaction option is switched on the contact detection algorithm will also check for external nodes of a part contacting with faces of the same part in addition to other parts This is the most robust contact setting since all possible external contacts should be detected Self interaction Tol 490 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The self interaction option enables automatic erosion when an element deforms such that one of its nodes comes within a specified distance of one of its faces This option will prevent volume elements becoming degenerate The specified distance is calculated using the Self interaction Tol value which is a factor in the range 0 1 to 0 5 This factor is multiplied by the smallest characteristic dimension of
393. to turning hidden line removal off i e you can see everything inside the region 142 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Polygons Polygon Plot Settings This window lets you turn on the plotting of polygons used in 2D Euler Lagrange coupling Check the box to turn outline plotting on Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 143 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Beam Sections Beam Section Plot Settings This window lets you control the plotting of beams 144 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 AUTODYN User Manual Circular Beam Plot Settings Select the number of facets to be plotted for each circular cross section beam Spring Plot Settings Select the Plot Springs toggle to enable the spring plot Y b3d2p2 Cycle 0 Tine 0 000E 000 ps X Units om g ps LARGE LAGRANGE BENCHMARK TEST Scale Select this option to normalize each plotted spring with the length of the spring element Fixed Length Select this option to display each plotted spri
394. together During the analysis the nodes are kept at the same relative position on the face to which they are bonded Bonds are allowed to fail and break upon a user defined criterion New Bonded Face Connection ioe ort Mavinum offset 1 000000e 004 Breakable Sess citera ie Normal Stress Limit Shear Stress Limi Selection method Face Groups Select parts to form connection Pasts forming bonded connection Add gt WBhody 1 WBbody 3 Remove Name Enter a name for the bonded face connection set Maximum Offset The automatic search algorithm for bonded regions will bond a node to the first face found within the specified offset distance To ensure nodes are bonded to the nearest face the value of the offset distance should be defined to be as small as possible Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 451 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Breakable By default the bonded face connection will not be breakable When the option Stress criteria is selected the bonded connection will fail and break upon a user defined stress failure criterion e By stress o Normal stress limit maximum normal stress that can be sustained at the bond o Shear stress limit maximum shear stress that can be sustained at the bond Failure of the bond occurs when exp 7 exp s f lo
395. ts interacting should be equal but opposite sign hence have very little contribution to the energy of the overall system Large imbalances in contact energy are indicative of poor model setups For the purpose of energy accountancy the contact energy is added to the work done on the system External forces The resultant external forces on a Part can now be easily extracted from a simulation by selecting the appropriate components as Part summary variables The components available are e X Y Z contact forces External forces applied to a Part from Lag Lag contact e X Y Z coupling forces External forces applied to a Part from Euler Lag coupling e X Y Z boundary forces External forces applied to Part from all boundary conditions e X Y Z total external forces The sum of all external forces acting on a Part Note External forces are not extracted for polygon based Euler Lagrange coupling in 2D Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 565 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Example mine blast simulation highlighting source of loading blast from coupling impulse from soil ejecta using new Part summary options 566 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN
396. tten to the output file together with the color tolerance parameter Primitives are written with color per vertex information in the PostScript output The subdivision is made at print time in the PostScript processor This gives high quality output with small file size at the expense of slower printing The color tolerance parameter can be edited by hand to change the color resolution after the file has been generated Color tolerance Use this field to specify the absolute difference in color space for the color subdivision algorithms Precompute and Postcompute In Postcompute mode the color tolerance is written to the output file In precompute mode it is used by the OutputVPS module to subdivide the line segments and triangle facets which have per vertex color This real value must be in the range 0 0 to 1 0 Smaller values signify a finer subdivision Values close to zero will force a very large number of primitives to be generated either precomputed in the output file large file slow printing or postcomputed internally within the printer slow printing A value of 1 0 will not cause any subdivision to occur even when it is enabled by the subdivision flag The color tolerance user interface is not displayed for color subdivision None Depth Sort Algorithm Select the depth sort algorithm you want to use from the pull down menu Default Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential
397. tured element types have Beta status and therefore may not be as stable or robust as expected in a general release version 2 A 2D or 3D analysis involving unstructured parts with only rigid materials may result in unphysical results because rigid bodies do not have a minimum time step associated with them and therefore too large displacements may occur from cycle to cycle and contact can be missed For this type of analysis the user needs to manually define a small time step for the analysis SPH SPH 125 Euler Euler 111213 PROJECTILE VOLUME 448 TARGET VOLUME 3840 New Load Copy Save Del Euler Euler G 11 12 13 This panel lets you create structured Parts and modify the structured and unstructured Parts of your model Part List 214 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual The box at the top of this panel lists the Parts you have currently defined for your model You can select a Part in this list The size of the structured parts is displayed in terms of maximum I J and K of the part see Part Euler above Structured SPH parts are displayed in terms of the total number of SPH nodes because SPH parts don t use elements For unstructured parts the size of part is displayed as the total number of elements see Parts PROJECTILE and TARGET above
398. u do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Velocity 334 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Fill Datafile kai Datafile rte Datafle C Read Datafile Filename wf ben3d1 This window lets you write fill data to or from datafiles fil These data files are commonly used for remapping solutions from 1D Wedge 2D axysymmetric and 3D models into other 2D 3D models The figure below illustrates the remap operations available in AUTODYN Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 335 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual AUTODYN 2D 1D Wedge Euler Euler FCT AUTODYN 2D 2D Axial Euler Euler FCT AUTODYN 3D Euler FCT AUTODYN 2D Euler Euler FCT AUTODYN 3D Euler G Euler FCT ALE Lagrange AU TODYN 3D Euler FCT The AUTODYN 2D remap data file writing capability includes all state variables including the stress tensor etc You retain the existing option to only write hydrodynamic data if you wish to keep the size of the remap files to a minimum The AUTODYN 2D remap data file import capability allows 2D to 2D
399. ublished 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Interactions The Interactions dialog panel lets you define interactions between the various Parts of your model Buttons at the top of this panel let you choose which type of interaction you want to set up Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Euler Lagrange Lagrange Lagrange Press this button to set up impact slide interactions between Lagrangian Parts Parts using a Lagrange Shell Beam or SPH solver Euler Lagrange Press this button to set up coupling between Lagrangian Parts and Eulerian Parts 454 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 Lagrange Lagrange Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Interactions Lagrange Lagrange Euler Lagrange Interaction Gap Gap size 10 035250 Gap Type External Internal I Quick Check Calculate Create Check Erosion Retain inertia of eroded nodes J Prevent erosion of degenerate cells Interaction Matrix Add All Remove Remove a Range Friction Review IV Self interaction of parts Add Matrix ie Interaction Timestep 0 200000 Safety Factor Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information AUTODYN User Manual Interactions Lapeoetagene Eulet Lagrange
400. uitable for many applications however this number can be increased if better resolution of through thickness plastic deformation flow is required The following advanced options are also available Note these are not intended for general use Shear correction factor The transverse shear in the element formulation is taken as constant over the thickness The correction factor accounts for the replacement of the true parabolic variation through the thickness by a uniform transverse shear stress We do not recommend that you change the default value BCW warp correction The Belytschko Lin Tsay element formulation becomes inaccurate if the elements are warped To overcome this short coming the element formulation has a correction for the element warp included We recommend that this correction is turned on Thickness Update 380 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual By default the thickness of a shell element is stored and updated at the nodes of the element An alternative slightly more efficient option to store and update the thickness at the element is also provided Inertia Update The principal axes of rotary inertia for shell elements are by default re calculated each cycle Alternatively there is an option to rotate the axes rather than re compute each cycle This
401. ution 3D Shells 0 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 365 Parts Solvers Structured Solutions BEAMS ccccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 366 Parts Solvers Structured Solution 8D Euler FCT ceeeeeeeeeees 367 Parts Solvers Structured Solution 2D SPH ccceeeceeeeeesteeeeeeeees 368 Parts Solvers Structured Solution 3D SPH ceceeeeeseeeseteeeeeeeees 370 Parts Solvers Structured Dezone 2D amp 3D Euler cceeeeeeeeeeees 372 Parts Solver Structured Dezone 2D amp 3D Lagrange ALE 0 373 Parts Solvers Structured Jetting cc cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeensneeeeeeeees 375 Parts Solvers Unstructured Solid ccc ccceeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeees 377 Parts Solvers Unstructured Shell ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeees 380 Parts Solvers Unstructured B m ccccceeeessseecccceeeeeeeeetteseeeeeeeeeees 382 WOON S iestees cts cts cade cucatacsinas a tnat Vatasuas tte teat tatecuan iai 384 Parts SW OU OMS esseen ie sie Sa Sade dc ees Sede Seid etc ade dd ede bad eee 384 Parts Motons BIOCK 2 252 c2 sintcs eet a eat Sa tee oa 385 Parts Motions 1 J K Plane eececeeecccsceeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteseeeeeeeeeees 386 PatisWOlonsNOdG 22 34 en oe ee a eee ee aces 387 Parts Motions Modily s ccc2 s a waa Nala Nascent 388 CSOT GUY cide heresies hele one he s hated
402. utton delete all Parts of the selected Component Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 401 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Components New New Component VOLUME VOLUME 125 VOLUME VOLUME 125 This window lets you create a new Component Name Enter the name of your Component in this field All Parts This box initially shows a list of all the Parts in your model You can select one or more Parts in this list Component Parts This box initially empty shows a list of the Parts you have chosen for your Component Add 402 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Select one or more Parts in the left box and press this button to add the selected Parts to your Component The Parts will be removed from the list in the left box and added to the list in the right box as shown in the following example New Component VOLUME VOLUME 125 Remove Select one or more Parts in the right box and press this button to remove the selected Parts to your Component Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 403 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affilia
403. ve files Cycle Times Select whether you want data written at a set cycle frequency or time frequency Start cycle time Enter the cycle time that you want your first Save file to be written End cycle time Enter the cycle or time that you want your last Save file to be written If you are not sure how long you want to run your problem enter a large number in this field then you won t have to come back and change it later Increment 558 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Enter the frequency you wish files to be written between the start cycle time and the end cycle time Select Variables Press this button to select the structured or unstructured variables you want written to the Save file Select Save Variables Unstructured Solvers A WW XVELOCITY Y VELOCITY M Z VELOCITY M ABS VEL M EXTR M X FORCE EXT FY M EXT FZ I EXT CON FX I EXT CONFY EXT CONFZ M EXT COULFX EXT COUFY F EXT COUFZ F EXT BND FX EXT BND FY EXT BND FZ p M YFORCE M ZFORCE T MOMENT X 7 MOMENT Y 7 MOMENTZ f STN RATEX STN RATE Y f STNRATEZ STN RATEXY STN RATEYZ STN RATEZX DIVERGENCE r y F STRANXX 207 active variables 67 active variables LO For the structured solvers the majority of variables is automatically selected and
404. view all your gauge points in a window Plot gauge points Check this box to see the location of you gauge points in the view panel 354 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Interactive Selection Use the mouse to interactively select Elements or Nodes where you wish to place your gauge points by switching on Interactive Gauge points in the Gauges Panel E ANSYS AUTOOYN AUTODYN Fle inpet Setup Deaton Wew Options Hep EERE GO CEERRHR CE als SLE eLo ka E STEFI SMELL 100 Select gauge position Heitia ara with lt Alt gt Left STIEF SHELL 100 mouse button Gauge point coordinates shown The IJK indices or XYZ position of the selected element node will be displayed as they are selected Gauges added via this method will also be cached until cleared by selecting the Undo button or the Gauges Panel is closed When adding Gauges via this method the part containing the Element or Node selected becomes the selected Part in the Parts panel The interactive selection of Gauge Points is not available in examine mode and the panel will not be visible if this is the case Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 355 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009
405. volume elements Warning Activating this option can lead to unphysical results particularly if a large Gap size is used Erode over penetrated faces Check this box if you want elements with over penetrated faces to be eroded You should only check this box if you know this option is required to successfully complete your calculation Interaction by Part 482 Add Press this button to set interactions between Parts Add All Press this button to set all Parts to interact with each other Remove Press this button to remove interactions between Parts Remove All Press this button to remove all interactions between Parts Matrix Press this buttons to set interactions using a Part matrix Range Press this button to set the index range of each Part that will be checked for interactions Friction Press this button to set static friction coefficients between different Parts Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Review Press this button to review all your interaction settings Self interaction of Parts Check this box if you want Parts to interact with themselves i e test for self impact Interaction by Group In many calculations the contact region may be relatively small in comparison to the entire model and as the interactions calculation is numerica
406. w lets you save the current model under a new Ident Folder This field shows the current folder in which model files are saved Browse Press this button to browse to a new folder for saving model files Folder List Press this button to select a folder from your folder list for saving model files and or manage your folder list Ident Enter the new Ident you want to use for saving model data Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 55 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual PullDown Menus File SaveProject This option brings up the Workbench project page and allows you to save the current Workbench project and ensures that the AUTODYN analysis model and all Workbench related data is saved to disk Unsaved Project Workbench Me Yew Tods Units Help i New OF Open lab Save Al save As eipiocornet iQ Refresh Project 7 Update Project gi impet Grover Compact Made Cs e E uton B Analysts Systems Electric ANSYS GB Ergot Dynamics AUTOON E Ekt Dynamics 15 014 E Fis Fw RLENT GY Harmoni Response ANSYS Linear Buckling ANSYS Magnetostatic ANSYS GB Mods ansys 4 DAUTOOWN deta My PSPS Fles E Modal Soret ey wets ADAUTODW sample data Randan vteation ANSYS WB Response Spectrum ANSYS Shage Optimization ANSYS GB ati Structured ABAQUS State Structural
407. with 4 2 transition 3 1 transition This window lets you create a transition at any surface of the block you are zoning Transitions along Specify at which of the six surfaces of the block you want your transition to be created by selecting and J or K plane and whether it is the corresponding lower or upper surface of the block Transition orientation Select the orientation of the transition Transition Types The image above shows you the two transition types you can use namely a 4 2 transition and a 3 1 transition To use a particular type the index range in the direction of the transition orientation must be a multiple of 4 or 3 respectively A message will tell if a valid transition type exists for the boundary you have defined If more than one type is valid you will be asked to choose the transition type you want to use 298 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Node ka Create Zoning Node I Node J Node K Enter new node coordinates x coordinate 000000 coordinate 000000 Z coordinate 500000 This window lets you specify the coordinates of a single node Node I J K Enter the I J and K index to select the node you want to specify coordinates for in this field Old Coordinates The
408. wn menu Then type in parameter values in the fields provided EOS Bulk Modulus Reference Temperature Specific Heat Thermal Conductivity Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 191 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Strength This option lets you define the strength model you want to use for your material Press next to this option to expand the dialog Select the strength model you want to use from the pull down menu Then type in parameter values in the fields provided Strength von Mises B PI Shear Modulus 10 900000 Mbar Yield Stress 10 002000 Mbar Failure This option lets you define the failure model you want to use for your material Press next to this option to expand the dialog Select the failure model you want to use from the pull down menu Then type in parameter values in the fields provided 192 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Failure Plastic Stain v fea Plastic Strain x 1 010000e 020 none Crack Softening No v Stochastic failure No v Erosion This option lets you define the erosion model you want to use for your material Press next to this option to expand the
409. x PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Lagrange 17 41 7 From index To index From J index Tod index From K index To K index This window lets you delete the zoning in a Part Parts List In the top box select the Part in which you want to delete some zoning Index Range Specify the index range of the nodes whose zoning you want to delete The coordinates of all nodes in the index range will be set to Undefined the default state 310 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zoning Save Kal Save Part Zoning Pick part s zoning to save PROJECTILE Lagrange 9 5 15 TARGET Lagrange 17 41 7 TARGETS Lagrange 5 10 31 lt This window lets you temporarily save the zoning for one or more Parts This is a useful option if you are about to do some detailed zoning changes and want to ensure you can return to your original zoning if you make a mistake Pressing the Restore button in the Parts Zoning panel lets you restore the saved zoning Select the Parts whose zoning you want to save and press va Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 311 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts Zon
410. ylinder in this field Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Parts New Define Zoning 2D This window lets you Define the zoning for your 2D Part Box No Grading Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 241 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 1 1 5 AUTODYN User Manual 242 ia Part Wizard Projectile Define Zoning Cells in direction Cells in J direction Nodes 20 Elements 12 Fixed size dx 1 0 000000 Times nl Centred Lower Upper IV Grade zoning in J direction Fixed size dy Times nJ i Centred Lower UpperJ Grading in X and Y Cells Enter the number of cells elements you want to use in the I and J directions in fields provided The corresponding number of nodes and elements required for your part will be displayed below Grade zoning Check the boxes if you want to grade your zoning in any direction If you choose this option you can specify a range of cells which have a fixed size The remaining cells will be smoothly graded to fit the overall dimension of the box you specified in the previous window Fixed size Enter the dimension you want to use for the fixed size cells in this f
411. you want to use to fill your Part from this Pull down menu You can define new materials by pressing the Materials button on the Navigation Bar or by pressing se next to the option in this window Parameters If you do not want to use an Initial Condition Set enter parameter values for your fill in the fields provided Density Energy Velocity Frag Brick 268 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Gi Part Wizard one IV Fill part BEEE Initial Cond Material C4 x Dei Int Energy x velocity ety Z velocity Radial Velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical z Angular Velocity Angular velocity 0 000000 origin 0 000000 Y origin 0 000000 Z origin 0 000000 Direction x 1 000000 Direction Y 0 000000 Direction Z 0 000000 Radial velocity Bonditon set piti Fill part F Ril with initial Condition Set Mortar Initial Cond Ct Y Mortar Material es ss bers vje Int Energy Z velocity Radial Velocity Radial velocity 0 000000 Symmetry Spherical Angular Velocity Angular velocity 0 000000 x origin 0 000000 Y origin 000000 Z origin 000000 Direction x 000000 Direction Y 000000 0 000000 x velocity Y velocity Direction Z Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All
412. your own minimum Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information 131 of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual and maximum scale values in this box You can also fix these scales for all plots useful when creating slideshows Surface vectors only Check this box if you only want to plot vectors on material surfaces This can speed up plotting significantly but is not always what you need particularly if your plot uses opacity Vector density This option lets you reduce the number of velocity vectors plotted which can speed up plotting significantly The option only applies to Lagrange and ALE parts You specify the reduction factor for each grid index I J and K 132 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Settings Gauge point Plot Type Settings Select all gauge points C Select gauge points by part C Select gauge points by number Marker scale 10 00 pe V Text labels Text size 20 x V Label bounds IV Label offset V Leading line Radial offsets x offset 0 05 ai p pi Y offset 0 05 Ki g gt Z offset 0 05 a This panel lets you set the following options for gauge point plots Select gauge points These option
413. ze between each frag brick in z dir IV Mortar included in above frag brick dimensions Number of elements in each frag brick in x dir Number of elements in each frag brick in y dir Number of elements in each frag brick in 2 dir Offset ratio between adjacent layers in x dir IV Fragment brick symmetric about x 0 The fragment brick wall is built with its axes parallel to the X Y and Z axes The X direction runs the length of the wall The Y direction runs the height of the wall The Z direction runs through the thickness of the wall Number of fragments bricks Use these fields to set the number of fragments bricks in the X Y and Z directions Length of each fragment brick 294 Release 12 1 2009 SAS IP Inc All rights reserved Contains proprietary and confidential information of ANSYS Inc and its subsidiaries and affiliates Published 2009 11 5 AUTODYN User Manual Use these fields to set the length of a single brick fragment in the X Y and Z directions Mortar size between each fragment brick Use these fields to set the mortar size or gap between fragments bricks Mortar included in dimension Check this box if you want the mortar size to be included in the length of each brick fragment Number of elements in each fragment brick Use these fields to set the number of elements per fragment brick in the X Y and Z directions Offset ratio Set the offset ratio for the fragments bricks in

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

消防ポンプ自動車 艤装仕様書 沼 田 市  Installation Manual Norweco - Department of Environmental Quality  Dual DP295 User's Manual  Descargar ficha de producto    Partie E : Module TASNEG  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file